Chevrolet - S - Series Pickups - Owners Manual - 1995 - 1995

Table ofContents Introduction - How to Use this Manual This sectiontells you how to use your manual and includessafety and vehicle damage warnings and symbols. Section 1 - Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains theair bag system. Section 2 - Features & Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle. Section 3 - Comfort Controls& Audio Systems This sectiontells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. Section 4 - Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. Section 5 - Problems on the Road This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine overheating,etc. Section 6- Service & Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good. Section 7 - Maintenance Schedule This sectiontells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. Section 8 - Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact GM for assistance and how to get service publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects”on page 8-4. Index Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. 1 Introduction 1995 Chevrolet S-IO Pickup Owner’s Manual Welcome This manual was prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your 1995 Chevrolet S-1 0 Pickup and to provide important safety information. There is also a Chevrolet Truck Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet. In some vehicles, there can be information manuals from other manufacturers like body buildersor special equipment companies. We urge you to review all these publications carefully.This will help you enjoy safe and trouble-free operation of your vehicle. When it comes to service, keep in mind thatyour Chevrolet dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested inyour complete satisfaction. Your dealer invites you to return for all of your service needs bothduring and after the warranty period. it to your Remember, if you have a concern and need help handling satisfaction, see the procedure in the Chevrolet Truck Warranty andOwner Assistance Information booklet. Thanks forchoosing a Chevrolet product.We value you as a member of the Chevrolet family. We want to assure you of our continuing interest in your pleasure and satisfaction with your vehicle. Chevrolet Motor Division General Motors Corporation 30007 Van Dyke Ave. Warren, Michigan @Copyright 1994 General Motors Corporation, Chevrolet Motor Division All Rights Reserved Second Edition Printed in U.S.A. .. 11 Important Notes fo Owners and Drivers About This Manual Please keepthis manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it. This manual includes the latest information at the timeit was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a French Language Manual: Aux proprietaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide enfrancais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd., 1500 Bonhill Rd., Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7. 4 ~0 CHEVROU1 General Motors,GM and the GM Emblem, Chevrolet and the Chevrolet Emblem, and S-10 are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. ... 111 How to Use This Manual Many people read their owner’s manualfrom beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. This will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. INDEX: A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back ofthe manual. It’s an alphabetical listof all that’s in the manual, andthe page number where you’ll find it. Safety Warnings andSymbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box with gray background and the wordCAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. A CAUTION: These mean thereis something that could hurtyou or other people. In the gray caution area, we tell you what the hazardis. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book.This safety symbol means “Don’t,” “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.” Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this book you will find these notices: NOTICE: These mean that there is something that could damage your vehicle. In the notice area, we tell you about somethingthat can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals,you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use yellow for cautions, blue for notices and the words CAUTION or NOTICE. Vehicle Symbols These are someof the symbols you will find on your vehicle. For example, these symbols areused on an original battery: Cautron Possible Injury Protect Eyes by Shielding Caustic Battery Acid Spark or Flame Could Could Cause Burns Explode Battery Avoid Sparks or Flames V These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: Fasten Safety Belts Door LockNnlock These symbols have to do with your lights: A I Master Lighting Switch Turn Signal Direction Hazard Warning Flasher - Parking Lights Daytime Running Lights Vi Fog Lights Headlight High Beam Headlight Low Beam These symbols are on some of your controls: 0 Windshield Washer Windshield Defroster Windshield Wiper Off Ventilating Fan These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: Engine Coolant Temperature Fuel Charging Battery System SHIFT Brake Anti-Lock Shift Light Brake vi i Engine Oil Pressure Here are some other symbols you may see: I Hood Release ... Vlll Seats & Restraint Systems Section Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts. Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats-how and down. to adjust them, and fold them up Front Seat (Except Easy Entry) 1 A CAUTION: You can lose controlof the vehicle ifyou try to adjusta manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. 1-1 r Move the lever under the front of the seat towards the driver’s door to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your bodyto make sure the seat is locked into place. Front Seat (Easy Entry Only) 7 Move the lever under the front of the seat up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place. If you have this feature, there will be a knob on the outside of the driver and passenger bucket seats. Turn the top of the knob forward to increase lumbar support or rearward to decrease lumbar support. 1-2 Reclining Front Seatbacks (Bucket Seats or 60/40 Bench) To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side of the seat. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an upright position. But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. 1-3 A CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle inismotion can be dangerous. Evenif you buckle up, your safety belts can’tdo their jobwhen you’re reclined like this. The shoulderbelt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crashyou could go into it, receiving neckor otherinjuries. The lapbelt can’t doits job either. In a crashthe belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. For properprotection when the vehicle isin motion, havethe seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Front Seatback Latches The front seatback folds forward to let people get into the back seator reach the storage area behind theseat. Your seatback will move back andforth freely, unless you come to a sudden stop. Then it will lock in place. There’s one time the seatback may not fold withoutsome help from you. That’s if your vehicle is parked going down afairly steep hill. To fold a front seatback forward, push the seatback toward the rear as you lift this latch. Then the seatback will fold forward. The latch must be downfor the seat to work properly. 1-4 Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab) The outside front passenger bucket or split-bench seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get in and out of the rear vehicle area. When you tilt the outside front passenger seatback fully forward, the whole seat will slide forward. After someone gets into the rear seat area, move the seatback to its original position. Then move the seat rearward until it locks. A CAUTION: If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it can move. In a sudden stopor crash, the person sitting there could be injured. After you’ve usedit, be sure to push rearwardon an easy entry seat to be sure isit locked. ~~ To get out, again tilt the seatback fully forward. 1-5 Jump Seat (Extended Cab Models) Position Folded-Down Stored Position Your extended cab pickup has jump seats in the rear area. To fold thejump seat down, pull down on the handle on the bottom of the seat untilthe seat is in place, then move theseatback to a vertical position. To store the seat, fold the seatback down on the cushion, then push theentire seat up untilit is flush with the trim panels. Don’t let the safety belts bedamaged by the hinges or the latches. Safety belts should be folded and stored between the seat cushion and seatback. Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly.It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint, or “air bag” system. A CAUTION: Don’t let anyone ride where heor she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash andyou’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries canbe much worse.You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejectedfrom it. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed. In the same crash, you might not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) In many states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll be in acrash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’tsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels. 1-7 Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn't stop. hl I 1-8 The person keeps going until stoppedby something. In a real vehicle,it could be the windshield ... or the instrument panel ... I or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense. Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts-and the Answers Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle a f e r an accidentif I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. 1-9 0:Why don’t they just put in air bags so people won ’t have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in more of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. Q: If I’m agood driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but ifyou’re in an accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect youfrom things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear SafetyBelts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size. Be awarethat there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver Position. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 1-10 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats”in the Index) SO YOU can sit UP straight. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. I 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull UP on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see“Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure therelease button on the buckle is positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. 1-11 1 I I I I I The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d beless likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries, The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restrainingforces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash. Q: What’s wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. 1-12 IA CAUTION: You can be seriouslyhurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose.In a crash you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulderbelt should fit against your body. Q: What’s wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. A CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckledin the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you. 1-13 Q: What’s wrong withthis? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. CAUTION: You can be sedoasly injuredif you wear the shoulder belt under your arm.In a crash, your body would move toofar forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too muchforce to the ribs, which aren’t as 1-14 Q: What’s wrong with this? A: The belt is twisted across the body. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be surethe belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. 1-15 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System w?) This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) system, or air bag. Your vehicle has anair bag for the driver. Here arethe most important things to know about the air bag system: A CAUTION: You can be severelyinjured orkilled in a crashif you aren’t wearing your safety belt-even if you havean airbag. Wearing your safety beltduring a crashhelps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. The air bag is onlya %upplemental restraint.” That is, it works with safety beltsbut doesn’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderateto severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. Theyaren’t designed to inflate at all in mllover, rear, side, or low-speed frontal crashes. Everyonein your vehicle, including the driver, should weara safety belt properly whether or not there’s an airbag for thatperson.?i;:? .. - /: .,, A CAUTION: Air bags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position for an air bag inflation in a crash. Always wearyour safety belt, even with an air bag, and sit as far back as you can while stillmaintaining control of your vehicle. 1-16 ’: There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. How the Air Bag System Works Where is theair bag? The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-17 When should an air bag inflate? The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level isabout 14 to 18 mph (23 to 29 k d h ) . The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range. Ifyour vehicle strikes something that will moveor deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.The air bag is not designedto inflate in rollovers, side impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would nothelp the occupant. In any particularcrash, no one can say whether anair bag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Inflation is determined by theangle of the impact and the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicledamage is only one indication of this. The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.As always, wear your safety belt.See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving. What makes an air bag inflate? In a frontal or near-frontal impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicleis suddenly stopping as a result of crash. a The sensing system triggers a chemical reactionof the sodium azide sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen gas, which inflates theair bag. The inflator, air bag, and related hardwareare all part of the air bag module packed inside the steering wheel. 1-18 How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel. The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers and rear and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. What will you see after an air bag inflates? After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates. This occurs so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module in the steering wheel hub will be hotfor a short time, but the part of the bag that comes into contact with you will not be hotto the touch. There will be some smokeand dust coming from vents in the deflated air bag. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor will it stop people from leaving the vehicle. A CAUTION: When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. The air bag is designed to inflate only once. After it inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include the air bag module and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. 1-19 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when thesensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usage atdeployment. Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that yourair bag system won’t work properly.See your dealer for service. NOTICE: If you damage the cover for the driver’s air bag, it may not work properly. You may haveto replace the air bag module.Do not open or breakthe air bag cover. Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle The air bag affects how your vehicle shouldbe serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your GM dealer and the 1995 GM Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service Publications” in the Index.The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. I A CAUTION: For up to2 minutes after theignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when,itinflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape, or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. 1-20 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle Qt If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bag from working properly? A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash. Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bag from working properly? A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or height, they may keep the air bag system from working properly. Also, the air bag system may not work properly if you relocateany of the air bag sensors. If you have any question about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure’’ in the Index.) Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible throughout the pregnancy. 1-21 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position,” earlier in this section. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. Ifit does, let it go back all the way and start again. Center Passenger Position Lap Belt If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit in the center position. 1-22 When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. I Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure therelease button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. Rear Seat Passengers (Extended Cab Jump Seats) Lap Belt These arereserve seating positions equipped with lap belts only. It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. 1-23 Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted canbe thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And theycan strike others in the vehiclewho are wearing safety belts. Each jump seat has a lap belt with no retractor.To make the belt longer,tilt the latch plate a little and pull the belt. 1-24 a. To make it shorter, pull the belt as shown until it is snug. Buckle and position it the same way as the lap part of the driver’s safety belt (see “Driver Position” in the Index). Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. Don’t use child restraints on these seats. They won’t work properly. Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies 1-25 A A . i 1-26 Child Restraints Be sure to follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to helpreduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. The child restraint must be secured properly in the center (except 60/40 bench seat) or right front passenger seat. If you have a 60/40 split bench seat, you must use the right front passenger seat. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it. Top Strap If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how to doit. 1-27 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Seat Position (Except60/40 Split Bench Seat) Don’t use child restraints in thecenter position of a60/40 bench seat. You’ll be using the lap belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint hasone. 1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-28 4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the safety beltquickly if you ever had to. 6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If the child restraint isn’t secure, turnthe latch plate over and buckle it again. Then see if it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the restraint in a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint maker for their advice about how to attach the child restraint properly. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger. Center Front Seat Position (60/40 Split Bench Seat) Don’t use a child restraintin this position. The restraint won’t work properly. 1-29 Jump Seats (Extended Cab) Don’t use child restraints in these positions. The restraints won’t work properly. Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the topstrap if the childrestraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-30 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face orneck, put it behind the child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of theshoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 1-31 6. To tighten the belt, feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove thechild restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Larger Children Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle's safety belts. Children who aren’t buckled up can be throWfl Out in a crasn. Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are. Q: What if a childis wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child isso small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to placethe child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one. 1-33 A CAUTION: Never do this. Here achild issitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wearsthe belt in this way, in a crash thechild might slideunder the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fastenaround you, you should useit. But if a safety belt isn’tlong enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just foryou, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. 1-34 Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then, make sure all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, anchorages and reminder systems are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged restraint system parts. If you see anything that might keep a restraint system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you’ve had a crash, doyou need new belts’? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then YOU need new belts. If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being usedat the time of the collision. Before replacing any safety belt, see your dealer for the correct part number. You’ll need the model year and modelnumber for your vehicle. The model year is on your title and registration. And you can find the model number on the CertificatiodTire label of your vehicle. See “Certification/Tire Label” in the Index. The model number on the replacement belt must be listed on the safety belt you want to replace. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out to see this label. 1-35 Notes 1-36 Features & Controls Section Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warningsystems that tell you ifeverything is working properly - and what to doif you have a problem. Keys 2- 1 A CAUTION: Leaving young children ina vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with young children. This vehicle has one double-sided key for the ignition and door locks. It willfit with either side up. i *I I I I Ill1 I * FMllM 11111 1 1 1 1 I 11111 IllUl 111111 I I I1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11.11 . 1 . . 1 ,1111. .... .I . I . When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a bar-coded 0000 The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells yourdealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this tagin a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using this tag. 2-2 I NOTICE: Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys. Your Doors And How They Work Side Doors To open the door from the outside, lift the handle and pull the door open. To open the door from the inside, pull the lever toward you and push the door open. 2-3 Door Locks There areseveral ways to lock and unlock your vehicle: From the outside: Use your key. 2-4 From the inside: To lock the door, slide the lever on your inside door rearward. Power Door Locks I If your vehicle has power door locks, push LOCK on the power door lock switch on the door armrest. This switch will lock all the doors at once. To unlock the doors, push on the raised area next to the key symbol. Tailgate You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle while pulling the tailgate down. When you put the tailgate back up, be sure it latches securely. 2-5 Tailgate Removal 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and remove both retaining cables. To remove each cable, turn it so the end faces the front. Then, push forward so the larger part of the hole is over the bolt. Pull the end over the bolt. 2. Lift the tailgate at the right side and pull it out at the left side. (The tailgate must be about halfway down, or the right side will not come out.) Reverse the procedure to reinstall. Make sure thetailgate is secure. Leaving Your Vehicle lr you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out andclose the door. Keyless Entry System If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock your doors from up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the key chain transmitter supplied with your vehicle. Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesiredoperation. 2-6 Should interference to this system occur, try this: Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions on battery replacement. 0 Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. This product has a maximum range. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. See your GM dealer or a qualified technician for service. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Operation When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s door will unlock automatically. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all doors will unlock. All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed. Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, the remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. You can match a transmitter to as many different vehicles as you own, provided they are equipped with exactly the same model system. (General Motors offers several different models of these systems on their vehicles.) Each vehicle can have only two transmitters matched to it. See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle. Battery Replacement Under normal use, the batteries in your key chain transmitter should last about two years. You can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close toyour vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the batteries. 2-7 Your transmitter housing snaps apart for ease in battery replacement. To open the housing: 1. Insert a dime between two halves of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole. 2. Removethe bottom by twisting the dime. 3. Remove and replace the batteries with two Duracell @-type batteries (DL2016 or equivalent), positive side down. 4. Align and snap together the back and toptransmitter housings. Theft Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features, we know that nothingwe put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Key in the lgnition If you walk away from your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves - so don’t do it. When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and takeit with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, andso will your ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also locks your transmission. And remember to lock the doors. 2-8 Parking at Nlght Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables outof sight. Put them in a storagearea, or take them with you. Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. But what if you have to leave your ignition key? Whatif you have to leave something valuablein your vehicle? Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box. Lock all the doors exceptthe driver’s. New Vehicle “Break-In” NOTICE: Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better inthe long run if you followthese guidelines: 0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first500 miles (804 km). Don’t drive at any one speed- fast or slow - for the first 500 miles (804 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this “breaking-in” guideline every timeyou get new brake linings. Don’t tow a trailer during“break-in.” See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information. 2-9 Ignition Switch Use your key to start your vehicle. The key lets you turn the ignition switch to five different positions. 1. OFF 2 2. RUN 3. START 4. ACC 5 5. LOCK ACC (Accessory) - ACC lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when theengine is off. To get into ACC, push inthe key and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key. Don’t operate accessories in the ACC position for long periods of time. Prolonged operationof accessories in theACC position could drain your battery and prevent you from starting your vehicle. LOCK -This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theftdeterrent feature. You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned toLOCK. OFF -This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn thesteering wheel. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion whilethe engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed). RUN -This isthe position for driving. START - This starts your engine. 2- 10 I NOTICE: If your key seemsstuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure it is allthe way in. If it is, then turn the steering wheel leftand right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a toolto force it could break the key or the ignition switch.If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. Key Release Button The key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release button is used. 2-11 To Remove the Key On manual transmission vehicles, turn the key to the LOCK position while pressing thekey release button down at the sametime. Pull the key straight out. On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to LOCK and pull it straight out. Starting Your Engine Engines start differently. The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number for your engine. You will find the VIN at the topleft of your instrument panel. (See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.) Follow the proper steps to start the engine. Automatic transmission: Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. NOTICE: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. ShiftPARK to (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. Manual transmission: The gearselector should be in neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to thefloor and start the engine.Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down - that’s a safety feature. To start your2.2 Liter engine: 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START, When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. r NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2- 12 2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clearsthe extra gasoline from the engine. ’ NOTICE: Your engine is designedto work with the electronics inyour vehicle. If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change the way the fuel injection system operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t, your engine might notperform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, seethe part of this manual thattells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. To start your 4.3 Liter Code Z engine: 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine getswarm. NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in START. If it doesn’t start in three seconds, push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down for 12 more seconds, or until it starts. 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try this: 4. Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down. Then push your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. Hold it there. Then, hold the key in START for no more than ten seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine still doesn’t start, wait another 15 seconds and do Step4 again. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. 2- 13 NOTICE: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the fuel injection system operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might notperform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, seethe part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index. To start your 4.3 Liter Code W engine: 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idlespeed will go down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your keyin START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal allthe way down for 5 seconds, or until it starts. 3. If your engine still won’t start, wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down and do it all again. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. NOTICE: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change the way the fuel injection systemoperates. Before adding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t,your engine might notperform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do itwithout damagingyour vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. Driving Through Deep Standing Water 1 NOTICE: If you drive too quicklythrough deep puddlesor standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddlesor standing water, drive through them very slowly. Engine Coo/ant Heater (Option) 2.2 Liter 1. Engine coolant heater cord cap 2. Engine coolant heater cord clip 2- 15 4.3 Liter A. Engine coolant heater cord strap B. Engine coolant heater cord cap In very cold weather, 0°F (-1 8 "C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting and better fuel economyduring engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. To use the coolant heater: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt outlet. . ...,.., A CAUTION: , , ~ ...;_ .. Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also,the wrong kindof extension cord could overheat andcause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord intoa properly grounded three-prong 110-volt outlet. If the cord won't reach, use a heavy-dutythree-prong extension cord rated forat least 15 amps. 2- 16 I NOTICE: After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the weather, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. Automatic Transmission I There are several different positions for your shift lever. If your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, it now features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster. This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is-capable of being moved out of the PARK (P) position. This means that if your key is in theOFF position, but not locked, there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time. If you have a need to leave your key in the ignition inthe OFF position for an extended period for any reason, it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery. PARK (P) -This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. 2-17 A CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set,Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engine is running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re onfairly level ground, always set your parking brake andmove the shift lever toPARK (P), If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle willbe free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) - if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N).So, be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear, two-wheel high (2HI)or four-wheel high (4HI) or four-wheel low (4LO) -not in NEUTRAL (N). See “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in theIndex. If you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. REVERSE (R) - Use this gear to back up. NOTICE: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is movingforward could damage your transmission. Shiftto REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see “If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. 0 NEUTRAL (N) - In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. 2 - 18 NOTICE: Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out PARK of (P) or NEUTRAL(N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty. 0 OVERDRIVE (@) - This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re: - Going less than about 35 mph (56 k d h ) , push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. - Going about 35 mph (56 k d h ) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. (a) OVERDRIVE should not be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving. Select DRIVE (D) when operating the vehicle under any of these conditions. 0 DRIVE (D) - This is like @, but you never go into Overdrive. You should use DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving. SECOND GEAR (2) - This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND GEAR ( 2 ) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. If you manually select SECOND GEAR (2), the transmission will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. 2- 19 0 FIR$T GEAR (1) - This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND GEAR (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put inFIRST GEAR (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into FIRST GEAR (1) until the vehicle is going slowlyenough. NOTICE: If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’ttry to drive. This might happen if you werestuck in very deepsand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with onlythe accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehiclein position on a hill. Five-Speed Manual Transmission This is your shift pattern. Here’s how to operate your transmission: 0 1 I FIRST GEAR (1) -Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST GEAR (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST GEAR (1) when you’re going less 20 than mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into 2-20 FIRST GEAR ( 1 ), put the shift leverin NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRSTGEAR ( 1 ) . 0 SECOND GEAR (2) - Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND GEAR (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. 0 THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH GEARS (3,4 and 5 ) - Shift into THIRD GEAR ( 3 ) ,FOURTH GEAR (4)-and FIFTH GEAR (5) the same way you do for SECOND GEAR (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. 0 To Stop - Let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL (N). 0 NEUTRAL (N)- Use this position when you start or idle your engine. 0 REVERSE (R)- To back up, press down the clutch pedal, wait about 6 seconds. then shift into REVERSE (R). Then let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. I NOTICE: Shift toREVERSE (R)only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission. Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for parking your vehicle. SHIFT Light If you have a manual transmission, you have an amber SHIFT light. This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy. It is located at the top ofyour cluster, above your fuel gage. ~ When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on. 2-21 While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift. Four- Wheel Drive Vehicles Only: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equippedwith a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when the transfercase is in 4LO. Locking Rear Axle If you have this feature, your rear axle can giveyou additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sandor gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels hasno traction and the other does, the locking feature will allow the wheel with tractionto move the vehicle. Parking Brake To Set the Parking Brake: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the ignitionis on, the brake system warning light will come on. To Release the Parking Brake: Hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the brake release lever. It is located on the bottom driver's side of the instrument panel. 2-22 NOTICE: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other partsof your vehicle. If you are ona hill: See “Parkingon Hills” in the Index. Thatsection shows how to turn your front wheels. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill: See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do firstto keep the trailer from moving. Shifting IntoPARK (P) (Automatic TransmissionModels Only) 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. 2-23 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this: Pull the lever toward you. Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in NEUTRAL (N). 4. Move the key to LOCK. 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can walk away from your vehicle with the key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission Models Only) 2-24 Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This iscalled “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. If “torque lock” does occur, you may needto have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Parkirig Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission Models Only) Before you get out of your vehicle, turn off your engine, put your manual transmission in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure your transfer case is ina drive gear. Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t. If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer, see “Parking on Hills” or “Towing a Trailer” inthe Index. Parking Over Things That Burn 8 A 2-25 Things thatcan burn could touchhot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. Engine Exhaust A CAUTION: Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t seeor smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might haveexhaust coming inif: 0 Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. 0 Your vehicle wasdamaged in a collision. Your vehicle wasdamaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. 0 Repairs weren’t done correctly. Your vehicleor exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into yourvehicle: Drive it only withall the windows down to blow out any CO; and Have your vehicle fixed immediately. 2-26 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. A CAUTION: _ - i . . If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear- not in NEUTRAL (N). Always set your parking brake. Follow the proper steps to be sureyour vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling atrailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. 2-27 Four- Wheel Drive (Option) If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. To shift out of two-wheel drive and into four-wheel drive, move the transfer case shift lever to 4HI or 4LO. You should use 2HI for most normal driving conditions, however. NOTICE: Driving in the4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain. Manual Transfer Case If your four-wheel drive vehicle has the manual transfer case, the transfer case shift lever is on the floor An indicator light near the lever shows you the transfer case settings: 0 2HI 4HI 0 N SET PARK BRAKE 4LO The frontaxle portion of the diagram on the indicator will light up when you shift into four-wheel drive. A slight delay between shifting and the pattern’s lighting is normal. If the pattern does not light up, or if the front axle lights do not go out after you shift out of four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system. Turn the INT LIGHTS switch located to the right of your headlight switch to dim your transfer case indicator light when your headlights or parking lights are on. This will also causeyour instrument panel lights to dim. 2HI -This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. 4HI -This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. N SET PARK BRAKE - Shift to this neutral setting only when your vehicle needs to be towed. 4LO -This setting also efigziges your front axle to give you extra traction and provides extra gear reduction. You may never need 4LO. It sends the maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud, or deepsnow and climbing or descending steep hills. You can shift from 2HI to 4HI or from 4HI to 2HI while the vehicle is moving. Do not press the transfer case shift lever button when shifting from 2HI to 4HI or from 4HI to 2HT. Your front axle will engage faster if you take your foot off of the accelerator for a few seconds after you shift. To shift your transfer case intoN SET PARK BRAKE: 1. Stop the vehicle and shift your transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 2. Set the parking brake. Your vehicle can roll unless the brakes are applied. 3. Pull the transfer case shift lever into N SET PARK BRAKE. To shift into orout of 4LO: 1. The vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) for an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal depressed with a manual transmission. 2. Press the transfer case shift button and shift in one continuous motion. Don’t pause in N SET PARK BRAKE asyou shift into or outof 4L0, or your gears could clash. Remember that driving in 4HI or 4LOmay reduce fuel economy. Also, driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer case harder to shift and reduce powertrain longevity. 2-29 Use theseswitches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. You can choose among three driving settings: 0 2HI - This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. 0 4HI -This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you needextra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. 4LO - This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction. You may never need4LO. It sends the maximum powerto all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in 0 sand, mud, deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills. Amber indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take yourvehicle in for service. When shifting, an indicator light will flash untilthe shift is completed then remain solidly lit. To shift from2HI to 4HI - Press and release the4HI switch. This canbe done at any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically. To shift from4HI to 2HI - Press and release the2HI switch. This canbe done atany speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically. To shift from2H1, or 4HI to 4LO - The vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal depressed in vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle slowly moving1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 k d h ) . Press and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the amber 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and go solid amber before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal. 2-30 If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the amber 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the and the transmission is shift unless your vehicle is below 3 mph (4.8 km/h) in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal depressed. On automatic transmission equipped vehicles: If your transfer case doesnot shift into 4L0, your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment. With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the 4LO switch. While the amber4LO indicator light is flashing, shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the 4LO indicator light goes solid amber before shifting your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4L0, but you should take your vehicle in for serviceso normal operation can be restored. To shift from 4LO to 4HI - Your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal depressed. Thepreferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle slowly moving 1 to 2 mph ( 1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must wait for the4HI indicator light to stop flashing and go solid amber beforeshifting your transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal. If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle is below 3 mph (4.8 kmh) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or theclutch pedal depressed. On automatic transmission equipped vehicles: If your transfer case doesnot shift into 4H1, your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment. With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the 4HI switch. While the4HI indicator light is flashing,shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the 4HI indicator light goes solid amber before shifting your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4H1, but you should take your vehicle in for service so normal operation can berestored. 2-31 Windows To open your manual windows, turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your side door windows. Push the side of the switch with the down arrow to lower the window. Push the side of the switch with the up arrow to raise the window. The driver’s window switch also has an “express” feature that allows it to lower without holding the window switch. Hold the driver’s window switch down for more than one half second to activate the express down feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly. The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow end of the switch. Sliding Rear Window Your vehicle may have a sliding rear window. Squeeze the latch in the center of the window and slide the glass to open it. When you close the window, be sure the latch catches. Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab) To open a rear swing-out window, pull the latch toward the front of the vehicle and then push the latch out and rearward. When you close the window, be sure the latch catches. Horn ' To sound the horn, press anywhere on the pad on the steering wheel. 2-33 Tilt Wheel (Option) I If you have thetilt steering wheel, you should adjust the steering wheel before you drive. I You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever. Move the steering wheel to acomfortable level, then release the leverto lock the wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your: Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Headlamp High-Low Beam 0 WindshieldWipers Windshield Washer Cruise Control (Option) 2-34 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator The turn signal has two upward (for Right) and two downward (for Left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. es A green arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turnor lane change. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the green arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself whenyou release it. As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the green arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs. If you have a trailer towing option with added wiringfor the trailer lights, a different turn signal flasher is used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lights regularly to make sure they are working. 2-35 Headlamp High-Low Beam To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, this blue indicator light on the instrument panel also will be on. Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it. For a single wipingcycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the bandon MIST longer. 2-36 You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes.This can be very useful inlight rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closerto LO, the shorter the delay. For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band awayfrom you to the LO position. For high speed wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the band to the off symbol. Remember that worn or damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. The windshield wiper motor is protected from overload by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow, etc. may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using your windshield wipers. Windshield Washer At the top of the multifunction lever there’s a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol and PUSH. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed. Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A bad mud splash can block your vision. You could hit another vehicle or gooff the road. Check your washer fluid level often. 2-37 I A CAUTION: In freezing weather, don’t useyour washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwisethe washer fluidcan form ice on the windshield, blockingyour vision. I NOTICE: When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freezeand damage your washer fluid tank andother parts of the washer system. Also,water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. ~ Fill your washer fluidtank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer systemand paint. Cruise Control (Option) If you have Cruise Control, the end of your multifunction lever will look like this. With Cruise Control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 k d h ) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise Control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). 2-38 If you have an automatic transmission and you apply your brakes, the Cruise Controlwill shut off. If you have amanual transmission and you apply your brakes or push the clutch pedal, the Cruise Control will shut off. To Set Cruise Control 1. Move the Cruise Control switch to ON. A CAUTION: If you leave your Cruise Control switch on when you're not go into Cruisewhen using Cruise, youmi&€ hit a button and you don't want to-Yaw could be startledand even lose control. Keep the Cruise Control switchOFF until you wantto use it. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Push in the set button at the end of the lever and release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 2-39 To Resume a Set Speed Suppose you set your Cruise Control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the Cruise Control. But you don’t need to reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the Cruise Control switch from ON to R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second. You’ll go right back upto your chosen speed and stay there. Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A (Resume/Accelerate) longer than half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be startled andeven lose control. So unless you want to go faster, don’t holdthe switch at R/A (Resume/Accelerate). To Increase Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to goto a higher speed. 1. Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push the button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. 2-40 I 2. lvlove the Cruise switch from ON to WA (Resume/Acceler ate). Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to WA (Resume/Accelerate). Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. To Reduce Speed While Using Cruise Control Push in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it. To slow down in very small amounts, push the button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k m h ) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the acceleratorpedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the Cruise Controlspeed you set earlier. 2-41 Using Cruise Controlon Hills How well your Cruise Control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steephills, you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of Cruise Control.Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use Cruise Control on steep hills. To Get Out of Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the Cruise Control: 0 Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transmission. 0 Move the Cruise switch to OFF. To Erase Speed Memory When you turn off the CruiseControl or the ignition, your Cruise Control set speed memoryis erased. 2-42 Your switches are on the driver’s side of your instrument panel. Push the top switch with the parking lamps symbol on it to turn on: 0 Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lamps 0 Transfer Case Indicator Light (if you have one) Push the bottom switch with the master lighting symbol on it to turn on all the lamps listed above as well as the headlamps. Push the side of the switch marked OFF to turn off your lamps. Turn the switch next to the headlamp switch up to make your instrument panel and transfer case lights brighter. Turn the switch all the way upto turn on the interior lamps. You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam by pulling on the multifunction lever. A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away if this happens. 2-43 Fog Lamps (Option) . .., . ... ', ,, .. , : L Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lights and/or low beam headlamps must be on or your fog lamps won't work. ',I.?: ,:'*$+A& .ii$..I.'.%$:~>:. -,.-.:* . ,, The foglamp switch is on the instrument panel underthe INT LIGHTS switch. Press the side of the switch with the light to turn the fog lamps on, and OFF to turn them off. A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on. Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turningon your headlamps. Fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again. 2-44 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) lndicator Light I You may have this light on the instrument panel. It goes on whenever the Daytime Running Lamps are on, the ignition is on, the headlamp switch is off, and the parking brake is released. Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) make it easier to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful when it’s raining andin the short periods after dawn and before sunset. Several countries, including Canada, require DRL. Vehicles sold in the United States may have this option. The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when: The ignition is on, 0 The headlamp switch is off, and 0 The parking brake is released. When the DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light is a reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. When you turn the headlamp switch off, the regular lamps will go off, and your high-beam headlamps will change to the reduced brightness of DRL. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake. Headamps-On Reminder A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are turned on and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACC. To turn the tone off, press the OFF switch. 2-45 Dome Lamp L The dome lamp will come on when the side doors are opened You can also turn the dome lamp on by turning the INT LIGHTS dimmer switch up until it clicks. A Mirrors Inside Mirror If your vehicle has optional map lamps, they will automatically come on for approximately 20 seconds when either front door is opened or unlocked with the Keyless Entry system, if so equipped, or until the ignition isturned to RUN or ACC. The lights will also stay on for approximately 15 seconds after you exit the vehicle. They will also stay on for 15 seconds when the interior light switch on the dash is turned on then off, while the ignitionis off. 2-46 Outside Mirrors Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle. Some mirrors are manually adjustable, and some mirrors come with an optional remote control adjustment switch. Find the switch on the driver's door armrest. Turn the knob in the switch to L or R to choose the mirror, then press the arrows on the outside switch ring to adjust the mirror. If you have the manually adjustable mirror, you canfold it before entering a carwash. To fold, pull the mirrors in towards the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out when finished. 2-47 Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. Sun VisorsNanity Mirrors To block out glare, you can swing down the top and bottom visors. You can also swing the bottom visor from side to side. Your visors may have an extension that can be pulled out for additional glare protection and a strap for holding small items, such as maps. Some visors have a lighted mirror. Just lift the cover up to turn on the mirror lights. 2-48 Accessory Power Outlets(Option) If you have accessory power outlets, you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment. Just pull down from the top of the door and follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install. These circuits are protected by a fuse and have maximum current levels. I NOTICE: When using the accessory power outlets, maximum electrical load must not exceed25 amps. Always turnoff any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periodswill drain your battery. Cigarette Lighter/Ashtray To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself. Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element. 2-49 The ashtray must be completely pulled out to open position before the ashtray cover opens and smoking material can be deposited. Don’t put papers andother things that burn into your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set themon fire causing damage. To remove the ashtray, push downon the metal cover.Then press up on the release tab on the panel under the metal cover and remove the ashtray. Storage Compartments Your vehicle may have a console compartment between the bucket seats. To open it, just squeeze the lever in the front of the console while lifting the top of the console. Your console also includes a handy place to hold cups. 2-50 Cupholders are on the front of split-bench seats. Squeeze the latch at the front of the cupholder and pull it straight out. The liner removes for easy cleaning and the cupholder is dishwasher safe. To open your glove box, squeeze the lever at the top of the glovebox and lower the door. Two cup depressions are provided for your convenience, but the glovebox should not be open while driving. 2-53 A storage compartment under your radio may be used to hold small items. You will find a storage pocket on each of the front doors. Some vehicles may have a storage pocket on the back of the bucket or 60/40 bench seats. 2-52 lnstrument Panel 1. Vents 2. Instrument Cluster 3. Air ConditionerLHeater 4. Glove Box 5. Sound System 6. Power Aux Outlets (Optional) 6. Cigarette Lighter 7. Brake Release Handle 8. Light Switches 9. Electronic Transfer Case (Option) 10. Fog Lamp Switch (Optional) 11. Ashtray 12. Storage Compartment lnstrument Cluster Your instrument clusteris designed tolet you know at a glancehow your vehicle is running. you’ll know how fast you’re going, abouthow much fuel you’ve used,and many other things you’ll need to know todrive safely and economically. 2-53 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has beendriven, in either miles (used in the U.S.) or kilometers (used in Canada). Tamper Resistant Odometer Tachometer Standard Cluster Cluster Your odometer is tamper resistant. It will show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, anda label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. 2-54 Trip Odometer Standard Cluster The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero. Make sure the button is completely depressed. TOset the trip odometer to zero, completely push the button near the readout. Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpmj. Each tachometer has a different limit depending on the powertrain in your vehicle. The tachometer has three areas: normal operating range, red warning range, and red danger range. 2-55 Normal operating range shows your engine speed during normal driving conditions. For example, when the needle points to 2, it means the engine is running at 2,000 revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer needle will vary all the time that the engine is running. The red warning range tells you that your engine speed is reachingits upper limits. Don’t drive very long with the tachometer in the red warningrange. If you have a manual transmission, shift to a higher gear assoon as possible. If you have anautomatic transmission, lift your foot off of the accelerator pedal. If you drive for very long with the tachometer in the red danger range, engine damage will result. I NOTICE: Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red range, or engine damagewill occur. The red danger range tells you that yourengine speed is at its upper limits. You should immediately shift to a higher gear, or lift your foot off of the accelerator pedal. If you drive for very long with the tachometer in the red danger range, engine damage will result. Warning Lights and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may beon your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or isa problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. Gages canindicate when there may beor is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’sa problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. 2-56 Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will come on forabout eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about 55 seconds. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the tone nor the light will come on. Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors and module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index. 2-57 You will see this light flash for a few seconds when you turn your ignition to RUN or START. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. If the air bag readiness light doesn’t come on when you start your vehicle, or stays on, or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Haveyour vehicle serviced right away. Brake System Warning Light 1 BRAKE Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake systemis divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work andstop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. Your vehicle also has rear-wheel or four-wheel anti-lock brakes. See “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem with either your regular or rear-wheel anti-lock brakes, or both. Have your brake system inspected right away. This light should come on briefly as you start the vehicle. Ifit doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn you if there’s a problem. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harderto push. Or, the pedalmay go closer to the floor. It may takelonger to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 2-58 The brake system warning light will also come onwhen you set your parking brake, and it will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light (Option) If your vehicle has four-wheel anti-lock brakes, it will have this yellow light. With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this part. 2-59 Indicator Lights Indicator lights go on when you use your turn signals, change from low beam headlights to high beams, or when you use your hazard flashers.The next few pages will also tell you about the indicator lights on your vehicle and help you locate them. Malfunction IndicatorLamp (SERVICE ENGINE SOON Light) SERVICE ENGINE SOON The amber Malfunction Indicator Lamp (SERVICE ENGINE SOON Light) is located at the top of your instrument panel. A computer monitors operation ofyour fuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems. This light should come on when the ignition ison, but the engine is not running, as a check to show you it is working. If it does not come on at all, have it fixed right away.If it stays on, or it comes on while you are driving, the computer is indicating that you have a problem. You should take your vehicle in for service soon. NOTICE: If you keep driving your vehicle with this on, lightafter awhile the emission controls won’t work as well, your fuel economy won’t be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs not covered by your warranty. If Your Vehicle is Equipped withOBD I1 Certain vehicles with 4.3 liter engines are equipped with a new emission diagnostic system. You can tell whether your vehicle has thissystem by reading your tune-up label located under the hood. If the label says “OBD 11” on it, the following instructions apply. Malfunction Indicator Lamp(SERVICE ENGINE SOON Light) Your vehicle is equipped with an onboard computerwhich monitors operation of the emission control system. This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the lifeof the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The “SERVICE ENGINE SOON’ light comes on to indicate when service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system beforeany problem is apparent, which may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This systemis also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. The “SERVICE ENGINE SOON, light should come on,as a checkto show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. This light will also come during amalfunction in one of two ways: 0 Light on steady - indicates a systemmalfunction has been detected. Drive the vehicle to the dealer for service at your first opportunity. 0 Light flashing- indicates a misfirehas been detected which may damage the emission control system. The damage may be reduced by lowering thevehicle speed, reducing theamount of cargo being hauled or trailered, avoiding hard acceleration, or by avoiding steepuphill grades. If these actions areeffective, the light will stop flashingand remain on steady. Drive the vehicleto a dealer forservice. If the light continues to flash, stop thevehicle. Wait for a steadylight to come on, then drive thevehicle to a dealer forservice. These following conditions also may cause the “SERVICE ENGINE SOON” light to comeon: Low FueVOut of Fuel -As the vehicle startsto run out of fuel the “SERVICE ENGINE SOON” light may come on as aresult of an engine misfire. Filling your gasoline tank should correct this condition. Make sure to install the gas capfully. It will require afew driving trips to turn the light off. Poor Quality Fuel- Be sureto fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. Your engine may not run efficiently on poor fuel. Poor fuel may cause stalling, hesitation or misfire. These conditionsmay go away when the engineis warned-up. However, poor quality fuel may cause the“SERVICE ENGINE SOON, light to come on. Have a dealer check the vehicle. If no problems are found, you may want to change to another brand of fuel. Driving Through StandingWater - Driving your vehicle through puddles of deep standingwater may result in a temporary misfire condition. This condition will usually correct itself shortly after the electrical system dries out. It will require afew driving trips to turn the lightoff. 2-61 Charging System lndicator Light The red charging system indicator light is above your oil temperature gage on your instrument cluster and will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running, as a check to show you it is working. It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the chargingsystem. It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving whilethis light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. CHECK GAGES lndicator Light CHECK GAGES This amber CHECK GAGES indicator light is above the fuel gage on the instrument cluster and will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. If the light comes on and stays on whileyou are driving, check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones. 2-62 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Indicator Light This green DRL indicator light is above the fuel gage on the instrument cluster. The DRL indicator light is on whenever the ignition is on and the headlight switch and parking brake are off. For more details about DRL, see “Daytime Running Lamps” in this section. SHIFT Indicator Light This amber SHIFT indicator light is atthe top of the instrument cluster of vehicles with manual transmissions. Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get the best fuel economy. See “SHIFT Light” in this section. 2- 63 Headlamp High-Beam Indicator Light This blue high-beam indicator light is above the engine oil temperature gage on the instrument cluster and is onwhenever you use your high beam headlamps. See “Headlamp High-Low Beam Changer” in this section. A Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Light This light with the green arrows is on both sides of the speedometer on the instrument cluster. The turn signal indicator will come on whenever you signal a turn or lane change. See “Turn and Lane Change Signal” in this section. 2-64 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gageshows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot! 210 It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible. Hot Coolant CanBurn you Badly! In Problems On The Road, this manual explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. Oil Pressure Gage The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a aangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure. 2-65 A CAUTION: Don’t keepdriving if the oil pressure is low. If you do,your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. NOTICE: Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not coveredby your warranty. Fuel Gage The fuel gage tells you about howmuch fuel you have remaining when the ignition is on. When the gage first indicates empty, you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more fuel soon. Here are fourthings that some owners ask about. None of these showa problem with your fuelgage: At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full. 0 It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was halffull, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. 0 The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up. The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition. For your fuel tank capacity, see the Index under “Fluid Capacities.” 2-66 Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on (in the RUN position), this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts. 14 9 When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and highwarning zones indicate the normal operating range. Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power. You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories. Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Center High MountedStop Lamp (CHMSL) Feed Wire Your vehicle includes a Center High Mounted Stop Lamp(CHMSL) located above the rear window. If equipment such as a cap or camper is installed, a wire labeled “Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)” feed is provided along the left rear frame. This wire should be used to install a CHMSL in the cap or camper. 2-67 Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle may have either a 5-wire or 7-wire harness. The 5-wire harness is stored under your vehicle, along the left rear frame crossmember. The harness has no connector, and you should have a qualified service person wire your harness for you. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the harnessin its original place. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t bedamaged. The 7-wire is stored under your vehicle along the rear frame crossmember. This harness has 30 a Amp. in-line fused battery feed wire and no connector, and should be wired bya qualified service person. Attach the harness to the trailer, then tape orstrap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store theharness in its original place. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. The fuse fortrailer wiring is in-line and located in left front side panel electrical block. 2-68 Comfort Controls& Audio Systems Section In this section you'll find out how to operate the comfort control systems and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure toread about the particular system supplied with your vehicle. Comfort Controls Heater Controls If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, your heater controls will look like this. The switch with the fan symbol changes the fan speed. To increase the fan speed, push the switch upward toward HI. To decrease the fan speed, push the switch downward toward LO. The upper knob changes the air temperature. Turn the knob clockwise for warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise for cooler air. 3-1 The lower knob changes the heater function anddetermines which outlets the air will flow through (instrument panel, defroster, heater,etc.). OFF - This setting turns off all heating functions. Some outside air will still come outof the heateroutlet whenever the vehicleis moving forward. VENT - Airflow is through the instrument panel vents. Set the upper knob to the temperature desired. This setting is useful for mild outside temperatures, when little heating or cooling is desired. BI-LEV - Outside air comes in through the heater floor vents and the instrument panel vents. This setting is useful in cool weather with bright sunlight. HEAT - Heated air comes out through the heater floor vents and windshield defroster vents. This setting is usefulfor cold weather. BLEND - Airflow is divided equally between the heaterfloor vent and the windshield defroster vents. This setting is useful in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the windshieldor side windows. DEF -This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster vents and some through the heater vents. This setting is useful when you havefog or ice onthe windshield. Heater/Air Conditioning Controls If your vehicle hasair conditioning, your heatedair conditioning controls will look like this. Before using your vehicle's air conditioning, open the windowsto clear the vehicle of hot air. The switch with the fan symbol changes the fan speed. To increase the fan speed, push the switch upward towardHI. To decrease the fan speed, push the switch downward toward LO. The upper knob changes the air temperature. Turn the knobclockwise for warmer air. Turn theknob counterclockwise for cooler air. 3-2 The lower knob selects the heater or air conditioning function and determines which outlets the air will flow through (instrument panel, defroster, heater, etc.). OFF - This setting turns off all heating functions. Some outsideair will still come outof the heater outlet whenever the vehicleis moving forward. MAX A/C - Air inside your vehicle is recirculated to maximize your air conditioner’s performanceand your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting cools theair the fastest and should be used tokeep “unwanted odors” and/or dust from entering the vehicle. NORM A/C - This setting cools outsideair and directs it through the instrument panel vents. This setting is useful for normal cooling on hot days. BI-LEV A/C - Air is delivered through the heater floor vents as well as the instrument panel vents. This setting is useful in cool weather with bright sunlight. VENT - Airflow is through the instrumentpanel vents. Set the upper knob to the temperature desired. This setting is useful for mild outside temperatures, when little heating or coolingis desired. The air conditioner does not run. HEAT -Heated air comes outthrough the heater floor vents and windshield defroster vents. This setting is useful for coldweather. BLEND - Airflow is divided equally between the heater floor vent and the windshield defroster vents. This setting is useful in cool weather when you have fog orice on the windshield or side windows. DEF - This setting directs most air through the windshield defroster vents and some throughthe heater vents. This setting is useful when you have fog or ice on the windshield. Engine Coolant Heater (Option) If you use the optional engine coolant heater before starting your engine, your heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat the passenger in the Index. compartment in cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” 3-3 Ventilation System Your vehicle's ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the side windows closed, air will flow into the frontair inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the rear air exhaust valve. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or theair conditioning fan isrunning. Ventilation Tips 0 Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better, reducingthe chance of fogging the inside of your windows. 0 When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. 0 Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle. You will find air vents in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel. 3-4 You can move the vents to direct the flow of air, or closethe vents altogether. When you close a vent, it will increase theflow of air coming out of any vents that are open. Audio Systems Your Delco@ audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. But you will get the most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco@systemcan do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineeringthat went into it. Setting the Clock (Audio Systems without a Compact Disc) To set the clock: 1. Press the SET button. 2. Within 5 seconds, push and hold SEEK until the correct minute appears on the display. 3. Press and hold SCAN until the correct hour appears on the display. To display the clockwith the ignition off, push the upper knob. The time will be displayed for afew seconds. Setting the Clock (Audio Systems with a Compact Disc) To set the clock: 1. Press the SET button. The radio may be on or off. 2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold either SEEK correct minute appearson the display. or 4 SEEK until the 3. Press and hold SCAN until the correct hour appears on the display. 3-5 How to Operate Your ETW AM-FM Stereo Audio System . . .. .. :.*:,.: This part tells you how your ETR@AM-FMstereo audio system works. Upper Knob (PWR-VOL-RECALL) - The upper knob has thesefour functions: Turn it to turn the system on and off. Turn it to control the volume. 0 Press it to display the time when the ignition is off. Press it to change between the clock and the radio station frequency displayed when the radio is on. BAL (Balance) - The control ring behind the upperknob adjusts the lefvright speaker balance. Lower Knob (TUNE-AM-FM) - The lower knob has two functions: 0 Turn it to tune in radio stations. 0 Press it to change between the AM and FM bands. FADE - The control ring behind the lowerknob adjusts the frondrear speaker balance. SEEK - Press the SEEK button to cause the receiver to SEEK the next higher station and stop. SCAN - Press the SCAN button to hear each station for a few seconds. Push it again when you reachthe station you want to listen to and the radio will stop scanning. “SCAN” appears in the display. 3-6 Pushbuttons - The fourpushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. To set the pushbuttons for up to fourteen favorite stations (7 AM and 7 FM): 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press the SET button. “SET” appears in the display. 3. Within 5 seconds, press one of the four pushbuttons to store the station. Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return. Repeat these steps for each pushbutton. NOTE: In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three additional stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Then do the following: I . Tune in the desired station. 2. Press the SET button. “SET” appears in the display momentarily. 3. Within 5 seconds, press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. (The station will return when the same two buttons are pressed again.) TREBLE - Slide the TREBLE lever up to increase the treble response. If a station is weak or noisy, slide the TREBLE lever down to reduce the noise. BASS - Slide the BASS lever up to increase the bass response. Adjust the BASS lever to give a pleasing sound to your ear. How to Operate Your ET/+@AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette System This part tells you how your ETR@AM-FM stereo audio cassette system works. 3-7 Upper Knob (PWR-VOL-PROG-RCL) functions: - The upper knob has these five 0 Turn it to turn the system on and off. 0 Turn it to control the volume. Press it to display the time when the ignition is off. Press itto change between the clockand the radiostation frequency displayed when the radiois on. 0 Press itto change sides of a tapewhen a cassette is playing. BAL (Balance) -The controlring behind the upper knob adjusts the lefdright speaker balance. Lower Knob (TUNE-AM-FM) -The lower knob has two functions: Turn it to tune in radio stations. Press it to change between the AM and FM bands. FADE - The controlring behind the lower knob adjusts the frondrear speaker balance. SEEK -Press theSEEK button to causethe receiver to SEEK the next higher station and stop. SCAN -Press the SCAN button to hear each station for a few seconds. Push itagain when you reach the station you want to listen to and the radio will stop scanning. “SCAN’ appears in thedisplay. Pushbuttons -The four pushbuttonslet you return to favorite stations. To set the pushbuttons forup to fourteen favorite stations (7 AM and 7 FM): 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press the SET button. “SET” appears in the display momentarily. 3. Within 5 seconds, press oneof the fourpushbuttons to store the station. Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return. NOTE: In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three additional stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. Then do the following: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Push the SET button. “SET” appears in the display momentarily. 3. Within 5 seconds, press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. (The station will return when the same two buttons are pressed again.) 3-8 Repeat thesesteps for each pair of buttons. TREBLE - Slide the TREBLE leverup to increase the treble response. If the station is weak or noisy, slide the TREBLE leverdown to reduce the noise. BASS - Slide theBASS lever up to increase thebass response. Adjust the BASS lever to give a pleasingsound to your ear. AUTO DNR - This unit is equipped with an automatic Dynamic Noise Reduction system. DNR@reduces background hiss on AM and FM radio broadcasts, as well as on cassette tapes. DNR@is aregistered trademark of National Semiconductor Corporation. @ To PIay A Cassette Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. Once the tapeis playing, use the upperand lower knobs for volume, balance and fade just asyou do for theradio. A lighted arrow shows which direction the tape is being played. FWD - To rapidly advance thetape, press 4 or b in the direction that the amber arrow points and the tape will rapidly go forwarduntil you press the STOP-EJECT button lightly. REV - To rapidly reverse thetape, press 4 or b in the oppositedirection that the amberarrow points and the tapewill rapidly reverse until you press the STOP-EJECT button lightly. PROGRAM -To go from oneside of the tape to the other, press the PWR-VOL-PROG-RCL knob. STOP-EJECT - To remove the tape or stopthe tape and switch to radio, press the STOP-EJECT button. If “Cln” (Clean) appearson the display when you insert your cassette tape, your cassette player needsto be cleaned.It will still play cassette tapes but it should be cleaned to prevent damage to your cassette tapes and the cassette tape player. See “Careof Your Cassette Tape Player” later in this section. After you have cleaned thecassette tape player, press and hold EJECT for5 seconds to reset the the “Cln”indicator. The radiowill display “- - -” to show the clean featurehas been reset. 3-9 How to Operate YourETW AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette System with Equalizer This part tells you how your ETR@AM-FM stereo audio cassette system with equalizer works: Upper Knob (PWR-VOL-PROG-RCL) - The upper knob has these five functions: 0 Turn it to turn the system on and off. Turn it to control the volume. Press it to display the time when the ignition is off. 0 Press it to change between the clock and the radio station frequency displayed when the radio is on. 0 Press it to change sides of a tape when a cassette is playing. BAL (Balance) -The control ring behind the upper knob adjusts the lefuright speaker balance. Lower Knob (TUNE-AM-FM) -The lower knob has two functions: 0 Turn it to tune in radio stations. 0 Press it to change between the AM and FM bands. FADE -The control ring behind the lower knob adjusts the fronthear speaker balance. SEEK - Press the SEEK button to cause the receiver to SEEK the next higher station and stop. SCAN -Press the SCAN button to hear each station for a few seconds. Push it again when you reach the station you want to listen to and the radio will stop scanning. “SCAN” appears in the display. Pushbuttons - The fourpushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. To set the pushbuttons for upto fourteen favorite stations (7 AM and 7 FM): 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Push the SET button. “SET” appears in the display for about 5 seconds. 3. Within the 5 seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons. Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return. NOTE: In addition to the four stations set as above, upto three additional stations may be preset on eachband by pressing two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. Then do the following: I . Tune in the desired station. 2. Press the SET button. 3. Within 5 seconds, press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time. (The station will return when thesame two buttons are pressed again.) Adjust the Tone - Use the levers in the upper middle left corner to set the bass, midrange, and treble until you get the sound you want. The 60 and 250 levers adjust the bass, 1 K is midrange, and 3.5K and 1OK control the treble. We suggest you start with the center lever (1 K) in the midpoint position, then move the others up until you get the amount of bass and treble you like. Am-St Button - The Am-St button is just below the SEARCH button. Push this when you tune to an AM station thatbroadcasts in stereo. Your STEREO light will come on when you’re receiving AM stereo. If you push Am-St and there is no more noise, it means the station is weak. You’ll hear the station better if you don’t use Am-St. Just push the Am-St button again to delete stereo. AUTO DNR@- This unit is equipped with an automatic Dynamic Noise Reduction system. DNR@reducesbackground hiss on AM and FM radio broadcasts, as well as on cassette tapes. DNR@isa registered trademark of National Semiconductor Corporation. To Flay A Cassette Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. Once the tape is playing, use the upper and lower knobs for volume, balance and fade just as you do for the radio. A lighted arrow shows which direction the tape is being played, 0 2 - The Cr02button lets you set the system for the type of cassette being used. If you are using chrome ormetal tapes, push the Cr02 button in. 3-11 FWD -To rapidly advance the tape, press 4 or in the direction that the amber arrow points and the tape will rapidly go forward until you press the STOP-EJECT button lightly. REV - To rapidly reverse thetape, press 4 or b in the opposite direction that the amberarrow points and the tape will rapidly reverse until you press the STOP-EJECT button lightly. SEARCH -Press the SEARCH button to therecessed position. Press b to go to the beginning of the next selection. Press 4 and the tape will reverse to the beginning of the currentselection. PROGRAM -To go from oneside of the tape to the other, press the PWR-VOL-PROG-RCL knob. STOP-EJECT -To remove the tape or stopthe tape and switch to radio, press the STOP-EJECT button. If “Cln” (Clean) appearson the display when you insert your cassette tape, your cassette player needs to be cleaned. It will still playcassette tapes but it should be cleanedto prevent damage to your cassette tapes and the cassette tape player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” later in this section. After you have cleaned the cassette tape player, press and hold EJECT for 5 seconds to reset the the “Cln” indicator. The radio will display “- - -’, to show the clean feature has been reset. Your Delco system may be able to receive C-QUAM@ stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the country use C-QUAM@ to produce stereo, though some donot. C-QUAM@ is a re istered trademark of Motorola Inc. If your Delco system can get C-QUAM % signals, your STEREO light will come on when you are receiving stereo. 3-12 How to OperateYour ETR@AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc(CD) System This part tells you how your ETR@AM-FM stereo system works: Upper Knob (PWR-VOL) - The upper knob has two functions: Turn it to turn the system on and off when the ignition is on. Turn it to control the volume. Volume will be displayed briefly unless LefdRight speaker control, Rear/Front speaker control, BASS or TREB are adjusted. Left/Right Speaker Control - The control ring behind the upperknob allows you to balance the sound between the left and rightspeakers. Balance will be displayed briefly when using this control. Lower Knob(TUNE-BAND) - The lower knob has two functions: Turn it to tune in radio stations. Press it to change between the AM and FM bands. RearFront Speaker Control - The control ring behind the lower knob fades the sound between your rear and front speakers. Fade levels will be briefly displayed. SEEK - Press the SEEK higher station. button to cause the receiver to seek the next Press the 4 SEEK button to cause the receiver to seek the next lower station. SCAN - Press the SCAN button to hear each station for a few seconds. Push it again when you reach the station you wantto listen to and the radio will stop scanning. “SC” appears in the display. 3-13 Pushbuttons -The fivepushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. They are also used when you play adisc. (See “To Play A Compact Disc”.) To set the pushbuttons for up to ten favorite stations (5 AM and 5 FM): 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Push the SET button. “SET” is displayed briefly. 3 . Within 5 seconds, push one of the five pushbuttons to store the station. Repeat Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return. the steps for each of the 5 AM and 5 FM stations. MUTE - Press the MUTE button and all soundfrom the radio or CD player stops. By pressing the button againsound will begin again. RCL - Press the RCL button to change between the clock and the radio station frequency displayed when the radio is on. RCL may be pressed when the ignition is off to see the time. v A BASS -Press the BASS to increase the bass tones and BASS to decrease bass tones. Press the center of the control for a preset BASS position. The bass level will bedisplayed briefly when using this control. v TREBLE - Press the TREB A to increase the treble tones and TREB to decrease the treble tones. Press thecenter of the control for a preset TREB position. The treble level will be displayed briefly when using this control. To Play A Compact Disc (CD) NOTICE: DO NOT use mini-discs that are called singles. They won’t eject. USE FULL-SIZE COMPACT DISCS. If the disc player is very a disc may come hot, or if you’re driving on a very rough road, out or just not play. If you see the word HOT on the display, the disc player is too hot to play the disc. Press RCL to make the word HOT go off the display. When things get back to normal, the disc should play again. Press PWR to turn the system on. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc should play. If the disc comes back out, check to see if any of the followingare true: 0 The disc is upside down. 0 It is dirty, scratched, or wet. 0 Too much moisture is in the air. (If there is, waitabout one hour and try again.) 3- 14 RCL - Press RCL to see what track is playing. Press it again within 5 seconds to see how long it has been playing. The track number also appears when you change thevolume or when a new track starts to play. COMP -Press the COMPbutton to make soft and loudpassages more nearly equal in volume. “COMP’ will appear in the display while using this control. RDM -The RDM button means random and when it is pressed, it causes the CD mechanism to play the tracks in a random order rather than in the sequential 1,2, 3 order. “RDM” will appear in the display while using this control. To return to normal sequence, press RDM again. REV - Press and hold the REV button to quickly return to a favorite passage. Release it to display the passage. The counter reading will be displayed while using this control. FWD - Press and hold the FWDbutton to advance quickly within a track. Release it toresume playing. Watch the display to stop at a specific passage. SCAN - Press SCAN to sample each track for approximately 10 seconds. Scanning will continue until the RDM, SCAN or any other motion button is pressed again. PREV - Hold the PREV (4SEEK) button, or press it more than once, and the disc will return to previous tracks. NEXT - Press NEXT (SEEK) , to hear the next track now instead of waiting until the present track is finished. If you hold this button or press it more than once, the disc will advance further. ST-PL - Press ST-PL (Stop-Play) to make the disc stop and the radio play. Press ST-PL again to restart the disc at the point where it stopped. Press PWR or turn the ignition key off to stop the disc player. The disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point whereit stopped. Press EJCT to eject the disc and make the radio play. The disc will start at track I when you reinsert it. Anti-Theft Feature Delco LOC II@ is an Anti-Theft feature for the compact disc player. It can be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally. Ifit is used, your player won’t be usable if it is everstolen, because it won’t turn on. The instructions below tell you how toenter a secret code into the system. If your car loses battery power for any reason, you must unlock the system with the secret code before the radio will turn on. 3-15 To Lock The System: 1. Write down any 6 digit number and keep it in a safe place. 2. Turn the ignition to the ACC (Accessory) or RUN position. 3. Press the PWR knob to turn the radio off. 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until “- - -” shows on the display. You are now ready to enter your secret code. Don’t wait more than 15 seconds between steps. 5. Press SET and “000” will appear on the display. 6. Press the SEEK or 4 button to make the first number appear. 7. Press SCAN to make the next two numbers agree with your code. 8. Press BAND and “000” will appear again. Now you are ready to enter the last three digits of your code. 9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the last three digits of your code. 10. Press BAND and “rEP’ will appear for 5 seconds and then “OOO” will appear. 11. Repeat steps 6 through 10. This time “SEC” will appear - indicating that the radio is secure. To Unlock The System After A Power Loss When battery power is reapplied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and “LOC” will appear on the display. Enter your secret code as follows. Pause no more than 15 seconds between steps. 1. Turn the ignition on. (Radio off.) 2. Press the SET button. The display will show “000”. 3. Enter the six digits of the code following steps 6-9 above. The display will show the numbers as entered. 4. Press the BAND knob and the time appears - indicating that the disabling sequence was successful. If the display indicates “SEC”, the numbers did not match and the unit is still secured. 3-16 Disabling The Theft System 1. Press presets 1 and 4 for 5 seconds with ignition on and radio off. The display will show “SEC”, indicating the unit is in the securemode. 2. Press the SETbutton. The displaywill show “000”. digits of the code followingsteps 6 and 7 of the 3. Enter the first three preceding paragraphs (To Lock the System). The display will show the numbers as entered. 4. Press the BAND knob. The radio will display “OOO”. 5. Enter the secondthree digits of the code. The displaywill show the numbers as entered. 6. Press the BANDknob. If the display shows“- - - ”, the disabling sequence was successful. The numbersmatched the user-selected code or the factoryback-up code, and theunit is in the UNSECURED mode. If the display shows “SEC”, the disabling sequence was unsuccessful and the numbersdid not match either of the codesand the unit will remain in the SECUREDmode. Understanding Radio Reception FM stereo will give you the bestsound. But FM signals will reach only about 10to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). And, tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals, causing thesound to comeand go. The rangefor most AM stations is greaterthan for FM, especially at night. The longer range,however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce thisnoise if you ever get it. AM Stereo means the Delco@system can receive C-QUAM@stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the count use C-QUAM@ to produce stereo, though some donot. (C-QUAM is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc.)If your Delco@system can getC-QUAM@,your “STEREO” light will come onwhen you’re receivingit. 3 Be aware that hearing damage fromloud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late.Your hearing can adaptto higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting thevolume control on your radio to a safe soundlevel before your hearing adaptsto it. To help avoid hearingloss or damage: 1. Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. 2. Increase volume slowlyuntil you hear comfortablyand clearly. 3-17 NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle -like a tape player,CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio - be sure you can add what you want.you If can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco@ radio or other systems, and even damage them. And, your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. Care of Your Cassette Playerand Tape A tape player that is notcleaned regularly is subject to reduced sound quality, ruining the cassette, or damaging the mechanism. Tapecassettes that are not properly stored in their plasticcases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and extreme heat, may notoperate properly and could cause premature failure of the tape player. Your tape player should be cleaned with every50 hours of use to provide optimum performance. Your radio may display “Cln” (Clean)to indicate that you have used your tape playerfor 50 hours without re-setting the tape clean timer. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, regardless of when the tape player was last cleaned, try playing a different cassetteto see if the tape or tape player is at fault. If the second cassette results in no improvement in sound quality, try cleaning the tape player. Proper tape player cleaning should be done with a scrubbingaction, non-abrasive cleaning cassette. This is a wet-type cleaning system that uses a cleaning cassette with pads whichscrub the tape head as the hubs ofthe cleaner cassette turn. To properly clean your tape player, followinstructions with the cleaning cassette. If you use this type of cleaner,the radio may display an error and eject the cartridge. This is normal and is the result of an added feature in the tape player thatdetects broken tapes. If anerror occurs, you will needto insert the cleaning cassette at least 3 times to thoroughly clean the tape player. You may prefer to use a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner. This type of cleaner uses a fabric beltto clean the tape head.This type of cleaner cassette will not cause an error, butit may not clean the tape player as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. 3-18 A scrubbing action cleaner cassette is available through your retailer (SPO 12344600). Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always verify that the cassette tape is in good condition and the tape player is clean before obtaining service on your tape player. NOTICE: Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will not work in your cassette player. These adapters will cause the radio to display an error and the adapter cassette will be ejected. Care of Compact Discs Handle discs' carefully. Store them in their original cases or otherprotective cases and away from directsunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center tothe edge. Antenna Care The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it. Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender. 3-19 Notes 3-20 I Your Driving and the Road Section 1 Here you’llfind information about drivingon different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving. Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about drivingis: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) Defensive drivingreally means “be ready foranything.” On city streets, rural roads, or freeways,it means “always expectthe unexpected.” 4-1 Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they mightdo. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents.Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you isgoing to brake or turn suddenly. Drunken Driving Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: Judgment 0 Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with theuse of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults -by some estimates, nearly half theadult population choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There aregood medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is forpeople never to drink alcohol and then drive. But whatif people do? How much is“too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: 0 How much alcohol consumed The drinker’s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it’s taken the drinker to consume the alcohol 4-2 According to the American Medical Association, a180-pound (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquorlike whiskey, gin or vodka. J It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have asomewhat lower BAC level. There is a genderdifference, too. Women generally have alower relative percentage of body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, thelimit is 0.08 percent. In some other countriesit’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the U.S. is 0.04 percent. The BACwill be over 0.10 percentafter three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it dependson how much alcohol isin the drinks, and how quickly theperson drinks them. But the ability to drive is affected wellbelow a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in acollision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above, A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having acollision is twelve timesgreater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance istwenty-five times greater! 4-3 The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in onedrink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There’s something else about drinking and driving that many peopledon’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s systemcan make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cordor heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator.All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to askmore of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-4 Braking Braking action involvesperception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide topush on the brake pedal. That’s perception time. Then you have to bring upyour foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about3/4 of a second.But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds more or with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugsand frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, avehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicleand others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distancesvary greatly with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement orgravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; and the conditionof your brakes. Avoid needless heavy braking. Somepeople drive in spurts - heavy acceleration followedby heavy braking -rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.Your brakes may not have timeto cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lotof heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate alot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longerbrake life. If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, thepedal may get harderto push down. If your engine stops, you will still have somepower brake assist. But you will use it when youbrake. Once thepower assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Your vehicle hasan advanced electronic braking system that can help you keep it undercontrol. If your vehicle has an anti-lock brake system warning light on the instrument panel, ithas four-wheel anti-lock brakes. Otherwise, ithas rear-wheel anti-lock brakes. When you start a vehiclethat has four-wheel anti-lock brakes and begin to drive away, you may hear a momentary motor or clickingnoise. This is theABS system testing itself. 4-5 Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet. You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS. A computer senses that wheels are slowingdown. With four-wheel anti-lock: If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes ateach front wheel and atthe rear wheels. The four-wheel anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. With rear-wheel anti-lock: If one of the rear wheels isabout to stop rolling, the computer will work the brakes at the rear wheels.The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: Anti-lock doesn't change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won't have time to apply your brakesif that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. 4-6 To Use Four-wheel Anii-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your anti-lock brakes work at all times - whether you are in two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive. To Use Rear- Wheel Anii-Lock Use rear-wheel anti-lock like regular brakes. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise outside your vehicle, but this is normal. Let anti-lock work for you, but remember: Your front wheels can still stop rolling. If that happens, release enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again so that you can steer. Braking in Emergencies At some time, nearly every driver gets ainto situation that requires hard braking The four-wheel anti-lock system lets you steer and brake at the same time. If you have the rear-wheel anti-lock braking system, your front wheels can stop rolling when you brake very hard.Once they do, the vehicle can’t respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was headed when thefront wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic. So, unless you have four-wheel anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking technique. This will give you maximum braking while maintaining steering control. You do this by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure. When you do, it will help maintain steering control. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Steering Tips Driving on Curves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road 4-7 surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you ,turn the front wheels. If there’sno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. The traction you canget in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control systems - steering and braking- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking candemand too much of those places. You can lose control. The samething can happen if you’re steering through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two control systems - steering and acceleration - can overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road and make you lose control. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the brakeor accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach acurve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gentlyinto the straightaway. Steering in Emergencies There aretimes when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in frontof you. You can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action - steering around theproblem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes -but, unless youhave four-wheel anti-lock, not enough to lock your front wheels. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem,to the left or right depending on the space available. 4-8 An emergency like this requires closeattention and a quickdecision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turnit a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all timesand wear safety belts properly. Off-Road Recovery You may find sometimethat your right wheels have dropped off the edgeof a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. If the level of the shoulderis only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to 114 turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway. 1. Edge of Road Surface 2. Slow Down 3. Left Approx. Quarter Turn 4. Recover 4-9 Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment, accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: 0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road,to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns.If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. 0 Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. 0 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass whileyou’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance. 0 When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’tget too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed asthe time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a “running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down anddrop back again and waitfor another opportunity. 0 If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn.But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. 0 Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your leftlane change signal before moving out of the right laneto pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle tosee its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.) 4- 10 0 Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. 0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. 0 If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. Loss of Control Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meetthe road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the roadto make a “mirrored surface” - and slow down when you have any doubt. 4- 11 Remember: If youhave the four-wheel anti-lock braking system, it helps avoid only the braking skid. The rear-wheel anti-lock braking system helps avoid only a rear braking skid. In a braking skid (wherethe front wheels are no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the brakes to get the front wheels rolling again. This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when you haveto stop suddenly. As long as the front wheels are rolling, you will have steering control. Driving Guidelines OR-Road Driving with YourFour-wheel Drive Vehicle This off-road guide is forvehicles that have four-wheel drive. Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index. If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level, solid surface. Off-road driving can be greatfun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. “Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In short, you’ve gone right back to nature. Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. Before You Go Off-Roading There are somethings to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four-wheel drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel?Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are thelocal laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check withlaw enforcement people in the area. Will yoube on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission. 4- 12 Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can. Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around. You’ll find other important information in this manual. See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier’’ and “Tires” in theIndex. Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Tryto learn of any blocked or closed roads. It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to oneof them, the other can help quickly. Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can behandy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to use it properly. 4-13 Getting Familiar withOff-Road Driving It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new and different driving skills. Here’s what wemean. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands, feet, and body you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds: you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. you have less time to react. you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles. you’ll need more distance forbraking, especially since you’re on an unpaved surface. Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its manydifferent features. Here are some thingsto consider. Sugace Conditions. Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking distances. 4- 14 Sur$ace Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are somethings to consider: Is the path ahead clear? 0 Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? 0 Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s more discussion of these subjects later.) 0 Will you have to stopsuddenly or change direction quickly? When you drive overobstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you’re not prepared. When you drive overbumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as well or at all. Because you will beon an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking. In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There areno road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn’t. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious - or even fatal - accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. (See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.) Driving On Off-Road Hills Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do. Thereare some hills that simply can’t be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. 4- 15 Approaching a Hill When you approach ahill, you need todecide if it’s one of those hills that’s just too steepto climb, descend, orcross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example,there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs. Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill. Is there a constantincline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface causetire slipping? Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make turning maneuvers? Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders, trees, logs orruts)? What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get outand walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out. Is the hill simply too rough? Steephills often have ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps. Use a low gear and get a firmgrip on the steering wheel. Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use more power than you need, because you don’t wantyour wheels to start spinning orsliding. 0 Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route. 4- 16 Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill. Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. 0 Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you’re there. Use your headlights even during the day. They make you more visible to oncoming traffic. Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is aboutto stall, andI can’t make it up the hill? A: If this happens, there are somethings you should do, and there are some things you must not do.First, here’s what you should do: Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it fromrolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake. If your engine is still running, shift the transmission into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in reverse. If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then, shift to reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back down thehill as straight as possible in reverse. As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover. Here are somethings you must not do if you stall, or areabout to stall, when going up a hill. 4-17 0 Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly andyou could go out of control. Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down. Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it’ssteep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the hill, you must back straight down the hill. Q: Suppose, after stalling,I try to back down the hill and decideI just can’t doit. What shouldI do? A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in first gear), and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stayclear of the path the vehicle would takeif it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N) when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. 4- 18 Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of things: 0 How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? 0 What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders? What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try tokeep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and they won’t haveto do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times. Q: Are there some things I should not do when driving downa hill? A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident. 0 When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across. You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down. 0 Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift. This is called “free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade. Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock: Avoid braking so hard that you lock the front wheels when going downhill. If your front wheels are locked, you can’t steer your vehicle. If your wheels lock up during downhill braking, you may feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways. To regain your direction, just ease off the brakes and steer to keep the front of the vehicle pointing straight downhill. 4- 19 Q: Am I likely to stall whengoing downhill? A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. Apply the parking brake. Shift to PARK (P) (or to Neutral with the manual transmission) and, while still braking,restart the engine. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down. 0 If the enginewon’t start, get out and get help. Driving Acrossan lncline Sooner orlater, an off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive across theincline. Here are somethings to consider: A hill that can be driven straight up or down may betoo steep to drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance from thefront wheels to therear wheels) reduces the likelihood thevehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across an incline, the much more narrow track width (the distance between the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving acrossan incline puts more weight on the downhillwheels. This could cause a downhillslide or a rollover. Surface conditions canbe a problem when you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over. Hidden obstacles can make the steepnessof the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression,your vehicle can tilt even more. For reasons like these, you need todecide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes acrossthe incline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over. 4-20 Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do? A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is toget out and “walk the course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it. Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you’ll be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. 4-21 Driving In Mud, Sand, Snow, Or Ice When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get goodtraction. You can’t accelerate as quickly, turningis more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking distances. It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud- the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the ideais to keep your vehiclemoving so you don’t get stuck. When you drive 6fi S a d , you’ll sense a change in wheel traction.But it will depend upon how loosely packed thesand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly whendriving on sand. This will improve traction. Hard packed snow and ice offer the worsttire traction. On these surfaces. it’s very easy tolose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control. Driving In Water Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy raincan mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is beforeyou drive through it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles,or exhaust pipe, don’t tryit - you probably won’t get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts. If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly. At fwt speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if youget your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be ableto start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop. 4-22 Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s only inches deep, it can still wash away the groundfrom under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Ron’t drive through rushing water. After Off-Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations can bea fire hazard. After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule foradditional information. Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. 4-23 Here are some tips on night driving. Drive defensively. 0 Don’t drink and drive. Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlights behind you. Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlights can light up only so much road ahead. In remote areas, watch for animals. 0 If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. Night Vision No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to seethe same thing at night as a 20-year-old. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlights, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlights), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching lights. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean - inside and out. Glare atnight is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlights light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlights should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and aren’t even aware of it, 4-24 Driving inthe Rain Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road you can’tstop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking. It’s wise tokeep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. I I Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going throughsome car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down beforeyou hit them. 4-25 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up underyour tires that they can actually ride on the water.This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. Butit can if your tires haven’tmuch tread or if the pressure inone ormore is low. Itcan happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higherspeeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Turn on your low-beam headlights - not just your parking lights - to help make you more visibleto others. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you passanother vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) 4-26 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. 0 Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) 0 Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough toneed it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. 4-27 Freeway Driving Mile formile, freeways (alsocalled thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways)are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. The most important adviceon freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left laneon a freewayas a passing lane. At the entrancethere is usually a rampthat leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to checktraffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changinglanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turnsignal. Just before you leave the lane, glancequickly over your shoulder to make sure thereisn’t another vehicle in your ‘.‘blind” spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you wantto leave thefreeway, move to the proper lanewell in advance. If you miss your exit do not, under any circumstances, stopand back up. Drive on to the next exit. 4-28 The exitramp can be curved, sometimesquite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are. Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you’re ready. Try to be wellrested. If you must start when you’re not fresh - such asafter a day’s work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in. Is your vehicle ready for along trip? If you keep it servicedand maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done beforestarting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it. Here are some thingsyou can checkbefore a trip: Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside? Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? Lights: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? 0 Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it justplain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine,and the rush of the wind against thevehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less thana second, and you could crashand be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. 4-29 Then here are some tips: Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. 0 Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service,or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planningto visit there, here are sometips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for information about driving off-road.) 0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. 0 Know how to godown hills. -Themost important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. 4-30 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lowergear. The lower gears help coolyour engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill better. Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut across the centerof the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. 0 As you go over the topof a hill, be alert. There could be somethingin your lane, like a stalled car oran accident. You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examplesare long grades, passingor no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, orwinding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. Be sure your engine coolant mix is correct. You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. 4-31 Include anice scraper, a smallbrush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have avery slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip”and will need to be very careful. What’s the worst time for this?“Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice canbe slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get “wet ice” when it’s about freezing (32O F ; O O C ) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing or loosesnow drive with caution. Accelerate gently. Try not tobreak the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. 4-32 Your anti-lock brakes improve your ability to make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of the surface of a trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you seea patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you are onit, Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. If You’re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things do to to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn on you hazard flashers. Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’v been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from - anything you can wrap around newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engineto keep wann, but be careful. 4-33 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat thatyou get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all theway to preserve the heat. Start theengine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. 4-34 Power Winches If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored. I NOTICE: - Operating a power winch withan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in gear may damage the transmission. Always put the transmission in a Neutral position while operating a power winch. Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake or block the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is equipped with an airbag, see “Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. Recreational Vehicle Towing (Four- Wheel Drive Only) If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you may tow it behind another vehicle providing it does not have the optional electronic shift transfer case. I NOTICE: Recreational vehicle towing is not recommended for vehicles with the optional electronic shift transfer case becausethe electronic shift has no neutral position. Before towing, you should: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Place the automatic transmission in PARK (P) or the manual transmission in the lowest gear (FIRST GEAR). 3. Firmly attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. Refer to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Place the transfer case shift lever in NEUTRAL (N). NOTICE: Removal of either propeller shaft is unnecessary. 4-35 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle. 6. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it one notch forward of the LOCK position. This places the key into the OFF position, which unlocks the steering column while preventing battery drain. Unlocking thesteering column will allow for proper movement of the front wheelshires during towing. NOTICE: You should exercise extra care whenever towing another vehicle. Loading Your Vehicle PAYLOAD 1=-I The Certificatioflirelabel is found on the driver’s door lock pillar. The label shows thesize of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This iscalled the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargoand trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer. 4-36 The CertificatiodTirelabel also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads onyour front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWR’sLPayloads. Please note the Certificatioflire label of your truck or consult your dealer for additional details. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer tohelp you load your vehicle the right way. NOTICE: Your warranty does not cover partsor components that fail because of overloading. If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. 4-37 There’s also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Two-Tiered Loading By positioning four 2” x 6” wooden planks across the width of thepickup box, you can create an upper load platform. The planks must be inserted in the pickup box depressions. The length of the planks must allowfor at least 3/4“ bearing surface on each end of the plank. When using this upper load platform, besure the load is securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The load’s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone over the rear axle. The zone is located in thearea between the The center of front of each fenderwell and the rear of each fenderwell. gravity height must not extend above the top of the pickup box flareboard. Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’staillamp area must be properly marked according to local laws and regulations. Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) of the rear axle. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Payload The Payload Capacity is shown on the CertificatiodTire label. This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can carry. Besure to include the weight of the people inside as part of your load. If you added any accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this. 4-38 Trai/eringPackage If your vehicle comes with the Trailering Package, there is also a loadrating which includes theweight of the vehicleand the trailer it tows. This rating is called the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR). When you weigh your trailer, be sure to include theweight of everything you put in it. And, remember to figure theweight of the people inside as part of your load. Your dealer can helpyou determine your GCWR. Add-on Equipment When you carry removable items,you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sureto weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment. NOTICE: Your warranty doesn’t cover parts or components that fail because of overloading. 4-39 Truck-Camper Loading Information Open your glove box and look for this label: GM 3 1 This label will tell youif your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a load your vehicle can carry, and howto spread out your load the right way. Also,it will help you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle. When you carry a slide-in camper, the totalcargo load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, plus everything else added to the camper after it left the factory; everything in the camper; and all the people inside. The CargoWeight Rating (CWR) is the maximum weightof the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include the weight of the people inside.But, you can figure about 150 pounds for each seating position. The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR. 4-40 Truck Loading Information 1.Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating. This is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at that point, would balance front and rear. Refer to Truck Camper Loading Information label in the glove box for “”’and “B” dimensions. Use rear edgeof load floor for measurement purposes. Example of Proper Truck and Camper Match 1. Camper center of gravity. 2. Recommended center of gravity location zone. The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the center of gravity z for your vehicle’s cargo load. Campers can only be installed in a long box pickup. Check your Truck-Camper Loading Labelin your glovebox to determine if your vehic can carry a slide-in camper. You must weigh any accessories, trailer hitches or other equipment you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra weight fromCWR. the This extra weight may shorten the center of gravity zone for your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. 4-41 If your slide-in camper and its load weigh less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger. Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle-camper match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR. After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper,drive to a weigh station and weigh on the front and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles. The loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more than either of the GAWRs.The total of the axle loads should not bemore than the GVWR. Open your driver’s door and look atthe door lock pillar for the Certificatiomire label to find out your GAWR and GVWR. If you’ve gone overyour weight ratings, move or take out some things until all the weights fall below the ratings. Ofcourse, you should always tie down any loose items when you load your vehicle or camper. When you install and load your slide-in camper, check the manufacturer’s instructions. If you want more information on curb weights, cargo weights, cargo weight rating and the correct center of gravity zonefor your vehicle, your dealer can help you. Just ask for a copy of “ConsumerInformation, Truck-Camper Loading.” Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailerattached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or the GAWR. You’ll get the best performanceif you spread out the weight of your load the right way, and if youchoose the correct hitch and trailer brakes. For more information, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may consider having the pickup box removed and acommercial or recreational body installed. However, we recommend that conversions of this type not be done to pickups. Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety. For specific information on this pickup, contact the GM Zone Office for your area. (See the “Warranty and Owner Assistance” booklet for ZoneOffice.) 4-42 Towing a Trailer NOTICE: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty.To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your GM dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Most vehicles are ready for sometrailer towing. If yours was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do, here are someimportant points. There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2,000 pounds (900 kg) or less. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 2,000 pounds (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. 4-43 Don’t tow a trailer at all during thefirst 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged. Then, during the first500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. If you have an automatic transmission, you should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a lower gear)when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your transmission. If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear)Three important considerations have to do with weight: Weight of the Trailer How heavy can atrailer safely be? It depends onhow you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperatureand how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at the addresslisted in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet. In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center 1908 Colonel SamDrive Oshawa, OntarioL1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load(A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because itaffects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The gross vehicle weight (GVW) includes the curbweight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. 4-44 A B If you’re using a“dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10% of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a “weight-distributing” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12% of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to seeif the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some items aroundin the trailer. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sureyour vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for coldtires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification label on the driver’s door lockpillar or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over theGVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue. Hitches It’s important to have thecorrect hitch equipment. Crosswinds,large trucks going by, and rough roads are afew reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are somerules to follow: If you use a step bumperhitch, and your trailer tongue has a V-shaped foot, yourbumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Check thedistance from the front edge of the footto the middleof the hitch ball socket. If the distance is lessthan 12 inches, take the foot off the trailer tongue. If you’ll be pulling atrailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 2,000 pounds (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitchand sway control of the propersize. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving. If your vehicle has the bumper delete option, do not bolt any type of hitch to the close-out panel. The close-out panel will not support a hitch. 4-45 Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailerso that the tongue will not drop tothe road ifit becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendationfor attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1,000pounds (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they mustbe adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Your trailer brakes system can tap into vehicle’s hydraulic brake system except: Don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the trailer’s brake system will use more than 0.02 cubic inch ( 0 . 3 ~of ~ )fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t workwell. You could even lose your brakes. Will the trailer parts take 3,000 psi (20 650kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must notbe used with your vehicle. If everything checks out this far, thenmake the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.Use steel brake tubing. Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lights, tires and mirror adjustment. Ifthe trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working. 4-46 Following Distance Stay at least twice as farbehind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guide you. Making Turns I NOTICE: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. Turn Signals When Towinga Trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included in the optional trailering package). The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus,you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. 4-47 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating. When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolantwill boil at a lowertemperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the enginerun while parked (preferably on level ground) with the automatictransmission in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied) fora few minutes before turning the engineoff. If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. Parking on Hi//s You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how todo it: 1. Apply your regular brakes,but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet, or into gear for amanual transmission. When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels into the curb. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load. 4. Reapply the regularbrakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or REVERSE (R) for amanual transmission. 5. If you have a four-wheeldrive vehicle with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear- not in NEUTRAL (N). 6. Release the parking brake. 4-48 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on Hill a 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: Start your engine; Shift into a gear; and Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule formore on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system, and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Trailer Lighting Systems Wiring See “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index. 4-49 Notes 4-50 Problems on the Road Section Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road. Hazard Warning Flashers ..@ . Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. I 1 1 5-1 Push the buttonon top of the steering column all the way downto make your front and rear turn signal lights flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. To turn off the flashers, push the button until thefirst click and release. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work.The flashers will stop if you step on the brake. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at theside of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Jump Starting If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle andsome jumper cables to start your vehicle. But pleasefollow the steps below todo it safely. 5-2 NOTICE: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it could damage your vehicle, even if youhave a manualtransmission. And if you have an automatic transmission, it won’t start that way. To Jump Start Your Vehicle; 1. Check the othervehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. NOTICE: If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. 2. Get the vehicles closeenough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehiclesaren’t touching eachother. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be ableto start your vehicle, and thebad grounding could damagethe electrical systems. You could be injuredif the vehicles roll. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL (N). If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure thetransfer case isnot in NEUTRAL (N). 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all lights that aren’t needed, and radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could saveyour radio! NOTICE: If you leave your radioon, it could be badly damaged.The repair wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. 5-3 A CAUTION: 5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect (+) to (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybeother parts too. A CAUTION: Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engines are running, 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with thedead battery. 5-4 Dead Battery (+) Good Battery (+) 7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. 8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) terminal. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the nextstep. The other end of the negative cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy unpainted metal part on theengine of the vehicle with the dead battery. Good Battery (-) Heavy Metal Engine Part 9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but thechance of sparks getting back to the batteryis much less. 5-5 10. Now start thevehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries make sure all connections are good. If it still won’t start, it probably needs service. 12. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal. Remove Cables In This Order: 2 3 1. HeavyMetal Engine Part 2. Good Battery (-) 3. Good Battery (+) 4. Dead Batten (+) Towing Your Vehicle Try to have aGM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle. They can provide theright equipment and know howto tow it without damage. If your vehicle has been changed since it was factory-new by adding things like fog lamps,aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things could be damaged during towing. Before you do anything,turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towing service: 0 Whether your vehicle has rear-wheel drive or four-wheel drive. The make, model, and year of your vehicle. 0 Whether you can move the shift lever for thetransmission and shift the transfer case, if you have one. 0 If there was an accident, what was damaged. 5-6 When your vehicle is being towed, have the key off. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission (either automatic or manual) should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the transfer case (either manual shift or electronic shift), if you have one, should be in2HI. The parking brake should be released. Don’t have your vehicle towed on the rear wheels, unless you have to. If the vehicle must be towed on the rear wheels, don’t go more than 35 mph (56 kmk) or farther than 50 miles (80 km)or your transmission will be damaged. If these limits must be exceeded, then the rear drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly. 5-7 Towing From the Front 5-8 NOTICE: Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor the front bumper system will be damaged. Use wheel lift or car-carrierequipment. Additional ramping may be requiredfor car-carrierequipment. Use safety chainsand wheel straps. If your vehicle has the four-wheel drive option, a dolly MUST be used under therear wheels when towingfrom the front. Towing From the Rear 5-9 I NOTICE: Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or the rear bumper system will be damaged. Use wheel liftor car-carrierequipment. Additional ramping may berequired for car-carrierequipment. Use safety chainsand wheel straps. If your vehicle has the four-wheel drive option, a dolly MUST be usedunder the front wheels when towingfrom the rear. Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle's instrument panel. If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get the overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you: Climb a long hill on a hot day. Stop after high speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades’’ in the Index. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise,shift to the highest gearwhile driving - AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0) or DRIVE (D) for automatic transmissions. If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for aboutten minutes. If the warning doesn’t comeback on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the warning, turn ofSthe engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. 5-11 When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what you'll see: A. Coolant recovery tank B. Radiator pressure cap C. Engine fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. The coolant level should beat the ADD mark. If it isn't, you may have a leak in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in the cooling system. 5-12 NOTICE: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine. How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at ADD, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and a proper antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mix.) I NOTICE: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant. 5-13 When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at ADD, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there's one more thing you can try.You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator, but besure the cooling system is cool before you do it. 5-14 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly to the left until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5- 15 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pres sure cap. I I 3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to the base of the filler neck. 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the ADD mark. 5-16 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine fan. 7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add moreof the proper mix through the filler neck until the levelreaches the base of thefiller neck. 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap lineup like this. 5-17 Engine Fan Noise This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch is engaged, the fan spinsfaster to provide more air to cool the engine.In most every day driving conditionsthe clutch is not engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This isnormal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages. You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine.It will go away as thefan clutch disengages. if a Tire Goes Flat It’s unusual for atire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes outof a tire, it’s much morelikely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,”here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a fronttire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout,particularly on a curve,acts much like a skid and may require thesame correction you’d use ina skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to useyour jacking equipmentto change aflat tire safely. 5-18 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers. A. Flat Tire B. Blocked Tire 5-19 The following steps will tell you howto use thejack and change a tire. Jacking Equipment Storage The jackingequipment you’ll need is stored behind thefront seats, either on the center wall (extended cab) or along the right wall (regular cab). To remove your jack cover, if you haveone, turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise. Remove the jack cover. To remove the wheel blocks, jack and wheel wrench, turn the wing nut counterclockwise. Pull the wheelblocks, jack and wheel wrench off. 5-20 Jack Storage Cover 1. Hub Cap Removal Tool (on some 4. Hub Cap Removal Tool (on some models) models) 2. Cover (Extended Cab) 5. Bolt 3. Cover (Standard Cab) NOTE: Restore coverand hub capremoval tool if provided. 5-21 Jacking Equipment 1. Wheel Wrench 2. Bracket 3. Jacking Instructions Tag (Roll and place tag behind the bracket after the tools are installed) 4. Bolt Location (Standard) 5. Bolt Location (ZR2) 6. Wheel Blocks 7. Nut 8. Rubber Band 9. Jack Position (ZR2) 10. Jack Position (Standard) Spare Tire Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your vehicle. 5-22 To Remove the Underbody-Mounted Spare Tire I NOTICE: Never remove or restow a tire frodto a stowage position under the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle when restowing. Insert the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle, into the hole in the rear bumper. Be sure thechisel end of the wheel wrench connects into thehoist shaft. ... 5-23 spare tire can be pulled out fromunder the vehicle. When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the retainer at the end of the cableand pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle. NOTICE: To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive vehicle before cable is restored. Underbody-Mounted Spare Tire 1. Wheel Wrench 2. Hoist Assembly 3. Retainer 4. Spring 5 . Tire 6. Valve Stem (Pointed Down) Changing the Tire Start with the jacking equipment. See “Jacking Equipment Storage”earlier in this section. Turn the jackhandle clockwise. Thatwill raise the jacklifthead a little. Before you start, block the frontand rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. Put your spare tire near the flattire. Hub Caps And Wheel Nut Caps You will have to take off hub caps orwheel nut caps to reach your wheel nuts. If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover eachnut, they must be removed in order to get thewheel nuts off. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove the wheel nut caps. 5-25 Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to the wheel. Remove these Some jackstorage covers are equipped with a hub cap removal tool. Position the hub cap removal tool in the notch and pull straight away from the wheel to avoid potential damage to the hub cap and wheel paindwheel surface. Remove the hub cap. If you have just an aluminum or plastic molded hub cap, pry it off with the chisel end of your wheel wrench. Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation wheel nuts molded into them.The wheel wrench won’t fit these imitation nuts, so don’t try to remove them with the socket end of the wheel wrench. 5-26 Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove them yet. Do not jack up thevehicle with people in or near the vehicle. Position the jack under the vehicle. A. Front Frame Hole B. Rear Frame Hole (ZR2) C . Spring Hanger Hole (Standard Pickups) Your vehicle has a hole in the frame near each frontwheel for the jack. On standard pickups there is a hole in the spring hanger near each rear wheel for the jack. On ZR2 models, the hole for the jack is located inthe frame in front of each rear wheel. Fit the jack into the hole nearest the flat tire. 5-27 NOTICE: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicleor may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack. Be sureto fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising your vehicle. Raise the vehicle by turning thejackhandle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit. Remove all the wheel nuts. 5-28 Take off the flat tire. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface. Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could falloff, causing a serious accident. 5-29 Put on the spare tire. Put thenuts on by hand. Make sure the cone-shaped end is toward the wheel. .~ ~ ~+ ~ , ,,, ~ . ; " ~ , ' ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . ~ ~ ~ I ;,~,$ i i Tighten eachnut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. If a nut can't be turned by hand, use the wheel wrench andsee your dealer as soon as possible. Lower the vehicle by turning the jackhandle counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. I ~ i 5-30 Tightening Wheel Nut Tightening Sequence , Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-cross sequenceas shown. Remove the wheel blocks. Storing the Jack and Spare Tire Return the jack,wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper location behind the seat. Secure the itemsand replace the jack cover, if you have one. Put the flattire where the sparetire was stored. If you have the underbody carrier: 1. Put thetire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle, with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear. 2. Pull the retaining bar through the wheel. NOTE: With ZR2 option, spring and retainer must be separated to insert through wheel opening. 5-31 3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle, through the hole in the rear bumper andinto the hoist shaft. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise until the tireis raised against the undersideof the vehicle. You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is secure, but pull on the tire to make sure. I NOTICE: Don’t use the existing hoist to store a tire with an aluminum wheel or it could damage the wheel. Secure the tire in the pickup bed. If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow What you don’t want todo when your vehicle is stuck is to spin yourwheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution. 5-32 NOTICE: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle asaswell the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth, you can destroy your transmission. For information aboutusing tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index. Rocking your vehicle to get it out: First, turn your steering wheel left and right.That will clear the areaaround your front wheels. Then shift back andforth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear(or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND ( 2 ) gear and REVERSE), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the acceleratorpedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t getyou out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks, if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” inthe Index. Using the Recovery Hooks Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. Therecovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may need to usethem if you’re stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving. 5-33 NOTICE: Never use the recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle.Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. 5-34 Service & Appearance Care Section Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluidand lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care. Service Your GM dealer knowsyour vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer forall your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. GenuineGM parts have one of these marks: Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do someof your own service work, you’ll want to get the proper GM Service Manual. Ittells you much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the properservice manual, see “Service Publications”in the Index. 6-1 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index. NOTICE: If you try to do your own service work without knowing enough about it, your vehicle could be damaged. Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You will find the VIN at the top leftof your instrument panel. (See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.) Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. With the 4.3L (Code W) engine, use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 9 1 octane or higher for high power performance, when towinga trailer or with a high payload requirement. But when operating with a light load as a normal condition, you may use middle grade or regular unleaded gasolines. The gasoline you use should meet specifications ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada. These fuels should have the proper additives, so you should not have to add anything tothe fuel. In the United States and Canada, it’s easy tobe sure you get the right kind of gasoline (unleaded). You’ll see UNLEADED right on the pump.And only unleaded nozzles willfit into your vehicle’s filler neck. Be sure the posted octane is at least 91 for premium, 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy 6-2 knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, itcan damage your engine. If you’re using fuel rated at 91 octane or higher and you still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of it. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem. What about gasoline with blending materials that contain oxygen (oxygenates), such as MTBE oralcohol? MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.” Fuel that is no more than 15 % MTBE is fine foryour vehicle. Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol. Properly-blended fuel that is no more than 10% ethanol is fine foryour vehicle. Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol. NOTICE: Fuel that is more than5% methanol is bad for your vehicle. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. And even5% at or less, there must be “cosolvents” and corrosion preventers in this to fuel help avoid these problems. Gasolines for CleanerAir Your use of gasoline with deposit control additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. That helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly. It’s good for your vehicle, and you’ll be doing your part for cleaner air. Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates. General Motors recommends that you use gasolines with these blending materials, such as MTBE and ethanol. By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts of the country that have high carbon monoxide levels. In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. General Motors recommends that you use reformulated gasoline. By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts of the country that have high ozone levels. You should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain deposit control additives and oxygenates, and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions. 6-3 Fuels in ForeignCountries If you plan on driving in another country outside the U.S. or Canada, unleaded fuel may be hard to find. Do not use leadedgasoline. If you use even one tankful, your emission controls won’t work wellor at all. With continuous use, spark plugs can get fouled, the exhaust system can corrode, and your engine oil can deteriorate quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen sensor will be damaged. All of that meanscostly repairs that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll bedriving. You can also write us at thefollowing address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation, North American Export Sales (NAES) 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Filling Your Tank The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the left side of your vehicle. . /” 6-4 While refueling, hang the cap inside the fuel door. To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). I Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index. When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until you hear a clicking noise. I NOTICE: If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If youget the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system might be damaged. 6-5 Checking Things Under the Hood To open the hood,first pull the handle inside the vehicle on the lower driver’s side of the instrument panel. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release. Lift the hood,release the hood prop from its retainer and putthe hood prop into the slot in the hood. You will have an underhood light that comes on when you lift the hood. 6-6 c- bI Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood Prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then just pull the hood down firmly to close. It will latch whendropped from 10 - 12 inches (25.5 - 30.48 cm) without pressing on the hood. 6-7 Engine Oil It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil mustbe warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. Turn off the engine and give theoil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. To Check Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down. 6-8 When to Add Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to add some oil.But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacitiesand Specifications” inthe Index. I NOTICE: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. The engineoil filler capis located on the driver’s side engine valve cover. Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through. What Kind of Oil to Use Oils of the proper quality for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. The “Starburst” symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API), and is preferred for usein your gasoline engine. If you change yourown oil, be sure you use oil that has the “Starburst” symbol on the frontof the oilcontainer. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oilput into your engine isAmerican Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. 6-9 You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart: RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUELECONOMYANDCOLDSTARTING,SELECTTHELOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THEEXPECTEDTEMPERATURERANGE. LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL HOT WEATHER / F + 100 . - +3a +80 - - +27 +60 - - +16 +40 - +20 - - -7 0. . -+4 - - 18 I SAE 5w-30 COLD WEATHER SAE IOW-30 IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30 GRADE OILS AREAVAILABLE, SAE 30 GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C). DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s going to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. 6- 10 I NOTICE: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the proper oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench@ oil (in Canada, GM Engine Oil) meets all the requirements for your vehicle. Engine Oil Additives Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added. When to Change Engine Oil See if any one of these is true for you: Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic). You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road frequently. 0 You frequently tow a trailer. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months - whichever comes first. If none of them is true, change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months - whichever comes first. 6 - 11 Four-wheel Drive Remote Oil Filter If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you will have a remote oil filter. There is a special accessdoor in the steering linkage shield assembly located under the radiator support. Twist the screwto lock or unlock the door. Engine Coolant Heater An engine coolant heater can be a big help if you have to parkoutside in very cold weather, 0°F (-1 8 O C) or colder. If your vehicle has this option, see “Engine Coolant Heater” in theIndex. What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails withsoap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threatto the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you havea problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service stationor a local recycling center for help. Air Cleaner To remove the round air cleaner filter for the 4.3L (VIN 2) engine, turn the wing nuts counterclockwise. Remove the cover and change the filter. Care should be taken during reassembly to ensure that the cover is on straight and the wingnuts are properly tightened. = To avoid ingesting dust in the engine, the arrow on the air cleaner lid should point to the front of the engine. 6- 12 To remove the rectangular air cleaner filter for the 4.3L (VIN W) engine, open both clamps and push the rear of the air cleaner back toward the rear of the engine compartment to change the filter. While reassembling the air cleaner assembly, ensure that the air cleaner cover tabs are fullyinserted into theslots in the air cleaner housing. On the 4.3L (VINW) engine, also make certain that the PCV air tube is properly seated in the left hand valve cover. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule todetermine when to replace the air filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ in the Index. I NOTICE: If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can causea damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. 6- 13 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to change your fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. I NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and on fall hot engine partsor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving: When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). 0 At high speed for quite a while. 0 In heavy traffic -especially in hot weather. 0 While pulling a trailer. To get theright reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). To check transmissionfluid hot: Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 k rn)when outside temperatures are above 50°F ( 10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (lO”C),drive the vehicle in THIRD GEAR (D) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for ten minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures. 6- 14 To check transmissionfluid cold: A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eighthours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idlefor five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F ( 10°C) ormore. If it's colder than 50°F ( lO"C), you may have to idle the enginelonger. Should the fluid level be low during a cold check, you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level. To check the fluid hotor cold Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). 0 With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: 1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 6- 15 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a int. Don ’Ioverjill. We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON -111, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@-I11 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. 8 After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.” When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the wav: then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstick in place. 6- 16 Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission doesn't require changing. How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get afalse reading. NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fallon hot engine partsor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading you if check your transmission fluid. Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case. Then, follow these steps: h 1. Remove the filler Plug2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps. 6-17 How to Add Fluid Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind offluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plughole. 3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting. A slight amount of play (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch) in the pedal is normal. When to Check and What toUse Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. How to Check The proper fluid should be addedif the level does not reach the bottomof the diaphragm when it’s in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. 6-18 Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it.See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. I 1 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Four- Wheel Drive Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. 6-19 How to Check Lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricantto use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of thefiller plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. If the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below thefiller plug hole. 6-20 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in Index. the Engine Coolant The following explainsyour cooling system and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. The proper coolant for your vehicle will: Give freezing protectiondown to -34°F (-37 “C). Give boiling protectionup to 262°F (128 “C). Protect against rust and corrosion. Help keep the proper engine temperature. Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. What to Use Use a mixtureof one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half antifreeze that meets “GM Specification6038-M,” or “GM Specification 6043-M’ with the 2.2L (LN2) Code 4 engine,which won’t damage aluminum parts. You can also use a recycled coolant conforming to “GM Specification 603%”’ or “GM Specification 6043-M” with the 2.2L (LN2) Code 4 engine.Use GM Coolant Supplement(Sealer) with a complete coolantflush and refill. If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else. 6-21 NOTICE: If you usean improper coolant mix, your engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. Too much water in the mix can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core and otherparts. Some conditions, such as air trapped in the cooling system, can affect the coolant level in the radiator. Check the coolant level when theengine is cold and follow the steps under “Adding Coolant”for the proper way to add coolant. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have toadd extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. Adding Coolant I E 6-22 To Check Coolant When your engine is cold,the coolant level should be at ADD, or a little higher. When your engine iswarm, the level should be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher. To Add Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the coolant recovery tank. Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful notto spill it. Radiator Pressure Cap NOTICE: Your radiator cap is a15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. 6-23 When you replace your radiator pressure cap, a GM cap is recommended. See "Service Replacement Part and Filter Recommendations" in the Index. Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reachesa preset temperature. When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat is recommended. Power Steering Fluid A il 6-24 How To Check Power SteeringFluid When the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. What to Add Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See "Recommended Fluids and Lubricants" in the Index. NOTICE: When adding power steering fluid or making a complete fluid change, always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washerfluid, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. To Add Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. t L LL t 6-25 NOTICE: When using concentrated washerfluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. 0 Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.Also, water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid. 0 Fill your washer fluidtank only 314 full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion, which could damagethe tank if it is completely full. 0 Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. Brakes Brake Master Cylinder Your brake master cylinder is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. ~~ There are only two reasons why the brake fluid levelin your master cylinder might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new liningsare put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leakingout of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake systemfixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Addingbrake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. 6-26 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. To Check Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. Just look at the windows on the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid levels should be above MIN. If they aren’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the levels are above MIN and below the topof each window. What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid - sucn as Delco Supreme I I (GM Part No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only, and always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap before removing it. @ 6-27 NOTICE: Don’t let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Brake fluid can damage paint, so be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, washit off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in theIndex. Brake Wear Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. Disc brakepads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or beheard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). I NOTICE: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates may Cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. 6-28 Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear. If your brake pedal goes downfarther than normal, your rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake parts in them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When you replace parts of your braking system - for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to havenew ones put in - be sure you get new genuine GM replacement parts. If youdon’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Battery Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time for a new battery, werecommend a Delco Freedom@battery. Get onethat has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. Vehicle Storage If you’re not going to driveyour vehicle for 25 days ormore, take off the black, negative (-) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. 6-29 Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Bulb Replacement Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn't running. Sealed Beam Headlamps 1. Remove the screws from the headlamp retainer. 6-30 2. Pull the headlamp out and remove the retainer. 3. Unplugand remove the headlamp. 4. Plug in the new headlamp and put it in place. 5. Put the retainer on the headlamp and install and tighten the screws. Halogen Bulbs 6-31 Composite Headlamps 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the black protective caps from the removal pins at thetop of the radiator support. Use a hex socket to unscrew pins. 3. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out. (Some vehicles may have side by side bulbs.) 4. Unplugthe electrical connector. 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. 6-32 6. Put the new bulb into the headlamp lens assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight. 7. Plug in the electrical connector. 8. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and tighten the screws. Front Parlcrrurn SignalLamps (Composite and Sealed Beam) If you have fog lamps, the fog lamp bracket must be removed beforeyou can replace the front park/turn signal lamps. ,,.: : ; . . I . Reach under the bumper and behind the parkinghrn signal lamp assembly. 2 . Push the tab on the socket, turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it out. 6-33 3. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks. 5. Put the socket back into the parkinghum signal lamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks in place. Rear Lamps 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove the screws from the lamp assembly near the tailgate latch. Pull out the assembly. 3. Pull the assembly away from the pickup side panel. 4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it. Push the tab in while you turn the socket. 6-34 5. Pull the bulb out. 6. Push the new bulb into the socket. 7. Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise until it locks in place. 8. Replace the assembly. Install and tighten the screws. 9. Close the tailgate. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 3. Remove the CHMSL bulb. 4. Install the new CHMSL bulb. 5. Replace the CHMSL lens. Install and tighten the screws. 6-35 Other Maintenance Items Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement I NOTICE: Use care when removing or installing a blade assembly. Accidental bumpingcan cause the arm to fall back and strike the windshield. To Remove the Old Wiper Blade: 0 Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position. 1. Blade Assembly 2. Arm Assembly 3. Locking Tab 4. Blade Pivot 5 . Hook Slot 6. Arm Hook Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The insert has two notches at oneend that arelocked by bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly. To Install the New Wiper Blade: Slide the insert (notched end last) into the blade claws at end “A”. Plastic caps will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted. 1 1. End “A” 2. End “B” 3. Retaining Caps 4. Notch 6-37 Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on bothsides of the insert slots. e 2 / 3 1. Claw in Notch 2. Correct Installation 3. Incorrect Installation Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook. Pull up untilthe pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot. 0 Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield. Air Conditioning Every now and then have your dealership check your air conditioning system to be sure it has not lost any cooling ability. If you think the system is not working properly, have your dealership check it out as soon as possible. The air conditioning will not work when the temperature is below40°F (4°C). 6-38 Lock Cylinders To be sure your locks operate properly, they must be lubricated. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to lubricate them and what type of lubricant to use. You should not use penetrating oils because they could wash out the factory installed lubricant and cause thelock to bind. De-icers which contain alcohol could also wash away the lubricant, so be sure to lubricate the lock after using a de-icer of this type. Exhaust System To help prevent damage toyour exhaust system, do not continue to drive your vehicle if you notice: Engine misfiring Loss of performance Exhaust system components hanging lower than normal. Loud exhaust system noises. Other unusual operating conditions Have your engine and exhaust system serviced regularly. Three-way Catalytic Converter Your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converter is designed to reduce the pollutants in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use only unleaded fuel in your vehicle. If you use leaded fuel, you could damage your three-way catalytic converter and other enginecomponents. Engine Control Module System This system has an oxygen (02) sensor that helps keep your engine’s air-fuel mixture at a proper level. Use only unleaded fuel in your vehicle. If you use leaded fuel, you could damage your oxygen (02) sensor and affect your vehicle’s emissions. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (SERVICE ENGINE SOON) This light on your instrument panel lets you know whenyour emission system needs service. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. 6-39 Tires We don’t make tires. Your newvehicle comeswith high quality tires made by a leadingtire manufacturer. These tires are warranted by the tire manufacturers and their warranties are delivered with every new vehicle. If your spare tire is a different brand than your roadtires, you will have a tire warranty folder from each of these manufacturers. Inflation - Tire Pressure The CertificatiodTire label which is on the driver’s door lock pillar, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires, when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than a mile. 6-40 ~~ NOTICE: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation) you can get: Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy. If your tires have too muchair (overinflati can get ‘e re Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards. When to Check Check your tires once amonth or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire. How to Check Use a goodquality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. Simply looking at the tires will not tell you the pressure, especially if you have radial tires - which may look properly inflated even if they’re underinflated. If your tires have valve caps, be sure to put them back on. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be inspected every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km) for any signs of unusual wear. If unusual wear is present, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See“When it’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section formore information. 6-41 The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See“Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals. FRT D FRT I D When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here. [/[ After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the CertificatiodTire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. 6-42 When it’s Time for New Tires Tread Wear Indicators One way to tell when it’s time fornew tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. You need a new tire if: You can see theindicators at three or more places around the tire. You can see cord or fabric showingthrough the tire’s rubber. 0 The tread or sidewallis cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or locationof the damage. Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Certificationmire label. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Specnumber. That way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling,speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPCnumber will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow). If you ever replaceyour tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. 6-43 Uniform Tire Quality Grading The followinginformation relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) Treadwear The treadwear gradeis a comparativerating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, tire a graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 112) times aswell on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction -A, ByC The traction grades, from highest to lowest are: A, B, and C. They represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature - A, 9, C The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law. 6-44 Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for tire a that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately in or combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. These grades aremolded on the sidewallsof passenger car tires. While thetires available as standard or optional equipment on General Motors vehiclesmay vary with respect to these grades,all such tires meet General Motors performance standards and have been approved for use on General Motorsvehicles. All passenger type (P Metric) tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to giveyou the longesttire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling oneway or the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (exceptsome aluminum wheels, which can sometimesbe repaired). See your GM dealer if any of these conditionsexist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel should have the sameload carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the sameway as the oneit replaces. If you need to replaceany of your wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace themonly with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sureto have theright wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle. 6-45 NOTICE: The wrong wheelcan also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis. Used Replacement Wheels 6-46 Tire Chains NOTICE: If your vehicle has P235/75R15, P235/70R15or 3lxl0.50R15LT/C size tires, don’t use tire chains; they can damage your vehicle. If you have other size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must.Use only SAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the drive axle tires (four-wheel-drive vehicles can use chains on both axles) and tighten them as tightly as possible withthe ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear thechains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels withchains on willdamage your vehicle. Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flameif you strike a match or getthem on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. 6-47 Never use these to clean your vehicle: 0 Gasoline 0 Benzene 0 Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine 0 Lacquer Thinner 0 Nail Polish Remover They canall be hazardous - some more than others - and they can all damage your vehicle, too. Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Alcohol 0 Laundry Soap 0 Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. Your GM dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They willclean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather. Here are some cleaningtips: Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. 0 Clean up stains as soon as you can -before they set. Use a cleancloth or sponge,and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately or it will set. 6-48 Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 0 Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following thedirections on the container label. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material. Don’t rub it roughly. As soon as you’ve cleaned thesection, use a sponge toremove the suds. 0 Rinse the sectionwith a clean, wet sponge. 0 Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer or a heatlamp. I NOTICE: Be careful. A blow dryer may scorch the fabric. 0 Wipe with a clean cloth. Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spotsand stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap. If you need to use a solvent: Gently scrape excesssoil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). Cleaningshould start at the outsideof the stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep changing to a cleansection of the cloth. 0 When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning ring. (See the previousNOTICE.) 6-49 Fabric Protection Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M product. Scotchgard" protects fabrics by repelling oil and water, whichare the carriers of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and carpet often to keep it looking new. Further information on cleaning is available by calline 1-800433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167). Special Cleaning Problems Greasy or Oily Stains Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can be removed as follows: Carefully scrape off excess stain. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will dissolve them and may cause them to spread. Non-Greasy Stains Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can be removed asfollows: Carefully scrapeoff excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution: I teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner. Combination Stains Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with cool water and allow to dry. If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner. 6-50 Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth. Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once. Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a solvent-type vinyl cleaner, Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap. For stubborn stains, use a mild solution of 10%isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) and 90% water. Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into finish, it can harm the leather. Cleaning thelop of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to seethrough the windshield under certain conditions. Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. 6-51 Glass Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films. Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011). The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and replaced when worn. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids & Lubricants” in the Index.) Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or a 100%cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. 6-52 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat.Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoatpaint finish. NOTICE: I Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc. can damageyour vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle assoon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfacesare subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can taketheir toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finish lookingnew by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metalparts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water isall that is usually needed. However, you may use GM Chrome Polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary. Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam orcaustic soap to clean aluminum. A coatingof wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts. Aluminum Wheels (If So Equipped) Your aluminum wheels have a protective coating similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, chrome polish, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage this coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax may be applied. 6-53 NOTICE: If you have aluminum wheels, don’t use an automatic vehicle wash that has hard silicon carbide cleaning brushes. These brushes can take the protective coating off your aluminum wheels. Tires To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. When applying a tire dressing always take careto wipe off any overspray or splash from painted surfaces. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish. Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure thebody repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Foreign Material Calcium chlorideand other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, and other foreign matter can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Use cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratchesin the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches canbe repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer or otherservice outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. 6-54 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for iceand snow removal and dust controlcan collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion(rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust systemeven though they have corrosionprotection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris cancollect. Dirt packed in closed areasof the frameshould be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you. Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment not made or sold by General Motors are not covered. 6-55 Appearance Care Materials Chart PART NUMBER 1050172 DESCRIPTION SIZE 16 oz. (0.473L) Tar and Road Oil Remover 1050173 16 oz. (0.473L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish 1050174 16 oz. (0.473L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner 32 oz. (0.946L)VinylLeather Cleaner 1050214 USAGE Removes old waxes, polishes, tar and road oil Removes rust and corrosion on chrome and stainless steel Cleans white and black tires Spot and stain removal on leather or vinyl Spot and stain removal on cloth and fabric Glass cleaning and spot cleaning on vinyls Cleans vinyl and cloth on door trim, seats, and carpet-also tires and mats 1050244 16 oz. (0.473L)FabricCleaner 1050427 23 oz. (0.680L) Glass Cleaner 1050429 6lbs.(2.72kg)Multi-Purpose Powder Cleaner 1050729 8 oz. (0.237L)VinylTopCleanerCleaning 1051055 16 oz. (0.473L)Preservatone 1051398 8 oz. (0.237L)SpotLifter 1052870 1050201 16 oz. (0.473L)Wash-Wax (conc.)Exteriorwash Exterior cleaner 16 oz. (0.473L)MagicMirror and polish Cleaner-Polish of vinyl tops Vinyl top dressing Spot and stain removal on cloth andfabric Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 TESTVNXX3XXQ09696 0 11 This isthe legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,on the driver's side. You can see itif you look through thewindshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth characterin your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications, and replacementparts. 6-57 L 4- W n I I n 6-58 Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: your VIN, 0 the model designation, 0 paint information, and 0 a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Add-on Electrical Equipment NOTICE: Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “ServicingYour Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. * Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle areprotected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. 6-59 Headlamps The headlampwiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the light switch. An electrical overload will cause the lights to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away. Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sureto get it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fusepanel protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed. Trailer Wiring Harness The optionalseven-wire trailer wiring harness is protected by an in-line fuse in the battery feed wire. This fuseis near the junctionblock in the front, driver’s side fender. See “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Features & Controls section. Fuse Block The fuseblock is in the instrument panel on the driver’s side. Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise. Then you can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. Extra fuses are provided in the cover. . .. .., 6-60 Be sure to use the correct fuse. Spare fusesare provided, however if you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a sparefuse, you can “borrow” oneof the correct value. Just pick some featureof your vehicle that you can getalong without-like the radio orcigarette lighter-and use its fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon as you can. See “Fusesand Circuit Breakers” in this section. To reinstall the fusepanel cover, push in and turn the fastener clockwise. Capacities and Specification Charts Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information availableat the timeof printing, and are subject to change.If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built, or if you have any questions, please contactyour GM truck dealer. Engine Ideniificafion Engine Type VIN Code Fuel Systems Emissions 2.2L L4 4 MPI* LD 4.3L V6 Z 4.3L V6 W m1** CPI** * LD LD *Multi-Port Fuel Injection **Throttle-Body Fuel Injection ***Central-Port Fuel Injection 6-61 Wheel Nut Torque TORQUE 95 ft. lbs. (130 Nom) DESCRIPTION Base or Optional Wheel Cooling System Capacity VIN 4 Z ENGINE 2.2L 4.3L 4.3L w QUANTITY* 11.5 Quarts (11 Liters) 12.1 Quarts (1 1.5 Liters) 12.1 Quarts (11.5 Liters) *All quantities are approximate. After refill, the level MUST be rechecked. Crankcase Capacity ENGINE VIN CODE 2.2L 4 4.3L z 4.3L W QUANTITY WITH FILTER* 4.5 Quarts (4.3 Liters) 4.5 Quarts (4.3 Liters) 4.5 Quarts (4.3 Liters) *All quantities are approximate. After refill, the level MUST be rechecked. Fuel Tank Capacity QUANTITY* 20 Gallons (76 Liters) TYPE Standard Tank *All quantities are approximate. 6-62 Lamp and Bulb Data LAMPS EXTERIOR Halogen Headlamps Sealed Beam Halogen Headlamps Composite Halogen Headlamps Composite Backup Lamp License Lamp(w/o Bumper) License Lamp (Step Bumper) Tail and Stop Lamps QUANTITY TRADE NO. 2 2El 2 2 9006 HB4 (Low Beam) 9005 HB3 (High Beam) 3057 2 194 2 194 2 3057 2 Marker Lamp-Front 194 Marker Lamp-Rear 194 3 157NA Parking and Signal Lamp Underhood Lamp 93 CHMSL 211-2 Fog Lamp INTERIOR Ash Tray Lamp Courtesy Lamp Dome Lamp Four-wheel Drive Indicator Heater & A/C Control Glovebox Compartment Lamp Rearview Mirror Lamps Sunshade Vanity Mirror Lamps See GM Dealer 1 161 2 1 906 2 12-2 6 161 3 1 37 1003 2 2 12-2 4 74 6-63 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LAMPS NOTE: A PC part number indicates that the bulb and base are one assembly and must be replaced as such. LAMPS Anti-lock Brake Warning Indicator Brake System Warning Indicator Check Gages Indicator Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Charging System Indicator High Beam Indicator Instrument Cluster Illumination Malfunction Indicator Lamp (ServiceEngine Soon) Seat Belt Indicator Turn Signal Indicator Upshift Indicator AIR BAG Indicator QUANTITY 1 TRADE NO. PC74 1 PC74 PC74 PC74 1 PC74 1 PC74 6 PC168 1 PC74 PC194 PC74 PC74 See GM Dealer 6-64 Fuses and Circuit Breakers *c-7 P 8 2QA ACCY Fuse Legend 10 Amp -Red 15 Amp - Blue 20 Amp - Yellow 25 Amp - Clear 30 Amp - Green 6- 65 NAME PWR ACCY PWR WDO STOP HA2 HORN DM T/L CTSY CIRCUITS PROTECTED Power Door Locks, Power Seat, Power Seat Lumbar, RKE Power Windows Stop Lamps, Hazard Lamps, Chime, CHMSL Relay, CHMSL Lamp Dome Lamps, Cargo Lamps, Visor Vanity Mirror, Cigarette Lighter, Inside Rearview Mirror Lamp, Overhead Console Lamps, Glove Box Lamp, Horns, Horn Relay, IP Courtesy Lamps, Power Outside Rearview Mirror, Liftglass Release Motor, Illuminated Entry Module Park Lamps, License Plate Lamps, Electric Shift Transfer Case Module, Under Hood Lamp, Rear Wiper, Fog Lamp Relay, Door Switch Lamp 6-66 NAME GAUGES ENG I HTR A/C PWR AUX RR DEFOG ECM BATT ECM IGN CIRCUITS PROTECTED Alternator Field, VTC, A/C Compressor Relay, Cluster Chime Module, DRL Relay Coil, Four-wheel Drive Indictor Lamp, DRL Module, Rear Defog Timer, TCCM Ignition, SIR Redundant Ignition, RKE Ignition 0 2 Sensor Heat Dr, EGR, Cam Sensor, CANN, Purge Heater-A/C Blower Motor, Temperature Door Motor, A/C Compressor Clutch, HI Blower Relay Coil, Timer Relay Coil Power Auxiliary Outlets, ALDL Rear Window Defogger PCMNCM Battery, ABS Battery (LN2), Fuel Pump PCM/VCM Ignition, Injectors, Crank Sensor, Coil Driver Module 6-67 NAME RADIO RDO BATT ILLUM DRL TURN-B/U CIRCUITS PROTECTED Radio, Inside Rearview Mirror Map Lamp, Overhead Console Reading Lamps, Rear Wiper, Rear Washer, Overhead Console Display Clock, Radio Battery, CD Player Cluster Illumination, Ash Tray Lamp,Radio Illumination, Heater Lamp, Four-wheel Drive Illumination, Chime Module, Fog Lamp Illumination, Rear Wiper Switch, Rear Defog Switch Illumination, Lift Glass Release Switch Illumination, Overhead Console Illumination Daytime Running Lamps Turn Signal and Back-up Lamps 6-68 NAME WIPER BRAKE 4WD CRANK FOG AIR BAG TRANS PRNDL CIRCUITS PROTECTED Windshield Washer, Windshield Wiper Motor DRAC, Anti-Lock Braking System, CruiseControl Electric Shift Transfer Case Crank Signal Fog Lamp Relay, Fog Lamps Air Bag Module 4L60E Automatic Transmission PRNDL Power Service Replacement Part and Filter Recommendations Engine (VIN) 2.2L (4) Oil Filter PF47 Air Cleaner Filter PCV Valve A1163C 4.3L (Z) PF52 A773C 4.3L (W) PF52 A1163C cv9ooc CV789C cv774c Spark Plugs* 2457 49 12 .CR43TSM .CR43TSM Fuel Filter GF48 1 GF48 1 GF48 1 Radiator Cap RC27 RC27 RC27 *Use copper-cored resistor type spark plugs. 6-69 Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer. For additional information, see your “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”booklet. Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity TYPE R-134a QUANTITY* 30 oz. ( 3 5 kg) or 2.0 lbs. (.91 kg) *All quantities are approximate. NOTICE: R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an air conditioning system. R-12 in an R-134a system will cause compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge, or poor air conditioning system performance. 6-70 Maintenance Schedule Section IMPORTANT: 7 KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan.? The Plan sctpplem.ent,sy o ~ ~ r new vehicle warranties. See your GM dealerafordetuils. Introduction Your Vehicle and the ~ vironment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance or the removal of important components can significantly affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or even the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to help keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. 7-1 How This Section is Organized The remainder of this section is dividedinto five parts: “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service centerdo these jobs. If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Service Publications” in the Index. “Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what should be checked whenever you stop for fuel. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your GM dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether youdo the work yourselfor have it done. “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this part. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done. In addition,it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They maybe needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. 7-2 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM dealer. This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts. The proper fluids andlubricants to use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. These schedules are for vehicles that: a carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s CertificatiodTire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. 0 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. a are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See “Off Road Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle” in the Index. a use the recommended unleaded fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. 7-3 Selecting the Right Schedule First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow: I Schedule I Follow Maintenance ScheduleI if any one of these is true for your vehicle: 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. 0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). 0 You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road frequently. 0 You frequently tow a trailer. Schedule I should also be followed if the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi, or other commercial application. I Schedule I Intervals I Every 3,000 Miles (5000 km) or 3 Months Engine Oil and Filter Change Chassis Lubrication Drive Axle Service At 6,000 Miles (10 OOO km) - Then Every 12,000 Miles (25 OOO km) Tire Rotation Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km) Air Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions Front Wheel Bearing Repack (or at each brake relining) (2WD Only) Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Spark Plug Replacement (Except 2.2L Code 4 engine) Fuel Filter Replacement Cooling System Service (or every 24 months) 7-4 Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) Automatic Transmission Service (severe conditions) Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Spark Plug Wire Inspection Engine TimingCheck Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection - Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) Spark Plug Replacement (2.2L Code4 engine Only) Schedule /I Definition Follow Schedule I1 only if none of the conditions from Schedule I is true. I Schedule I1 Intervals Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) Engine Oil and Filter Change (or every 12 months) Chassis Lubrication (orevery 12 months) Drive Axle Service At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) - Then Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km) Tire Rotation Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) Cooling System Service(or every 24 months) Spark Plug Replacement (Except 2.2L Code 4 engine) Fuel Filter Replacement Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Front Wheel Bearing Repack (2-Wheel Drive Only) Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) Automatic Transmission Service (severe conditions) 7-5 Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Spark Plug Wire Inspection Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection Engine Timing Check Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) Spark Plug Replacement (2.2L Code 4 engine only) I Maintenance Schedule I I The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km) at thesame intervals. Footnotes 3- The California Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of vehicle useful life.We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. ** Drive axle service: 0 Locking Differential - Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level and addfluid as needed. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). Standard Differential - Check fluid level and add fluid as needed at every oil change. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000miles (25 000 km). More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy-duty or off-road use. 7-6 Maintenance Schedule I 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichev&occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. DATE ** BY: ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED J 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occucs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED ** BY: I Maintenance Schedule I 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 7-9 SERVICED B Y I Maintenance Schedule I 21,000 Miles (35000 km) 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 monrns, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE StdVICED BY: I 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 7- 10 SERVICED B Y I Maintenance Schedule I 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) 0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** c DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever OCCuri first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Sewice. 0 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). (Continued) 7-11 i I Maintenance Schedule I (Continued) 0 Replace spark plugs (except 2.2L Code 4 engine). An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace air cleaner filter. Replace filter more often under dusty conditions. An Emission Control Service. 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE I SERVICED BY: I 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED 7- 12 I I Schedule Maintenance I I 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 39,000 Miles (65 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.*:k I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE I 7- 13 SERVICED BY: I Maintenance Schedule I 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, andclutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 7-14 SERVICED B Y I Maintenance Schedule I 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid andfilter do not require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. I DATE I -. ACTUALMILEAGE 7-15 SERVICED B Y I Maintenance Schedule I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case’ shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedalsprings (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** A DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. 7- 16 Maintenance Schedule I 57,000 Miles (95 000 km) 0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.q:* - DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking? 0 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace spark plugs (except 2.2L Code 4 engine). An Emission Control Service. (Continued) 7- 17 Maintenance Schedule I (Continued) 0 Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. f 0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. Replace air cleaner filter. Replace filter more often under dl conditions. An Emission Control Service. J 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. - DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: L 63,000 Miles (105 000 km) 0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE ‘7-18 SERVICED BY: Maintenance Schedule I 66,000 Miles (110 000km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant.velocity jointsand axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. CI Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals forleaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 7- 19 SERVICED BY: Maintenance Schedule I 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE I I SERVICED BY: 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brakerelining, whichever occurs first). Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE 7-20 I SERVICED BY: I --_ ~ Maintenance Schedule I 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 7-21 SERVICED BY: 1 I MaintenanceSchedule I 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 7-22 I Maintenance ScheduleI 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals forleaking.** 0 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace spark plugs (except 2.2L Code 4 engine). An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace air cleaner filter. Replace filter more often under dusty conditions. An Emission Control Service. 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. - DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE ; 7-23 SERVICED BY: 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE I SERVICED BY: 96,000 Miles (160 000km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedalsprings (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE 7-24 BY: I Maintenance Schedule I 99,000 Miles (165 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides,propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (orevery 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0 Replace spark plugs (2.2L Code 4 engine only). An Emission Control Service. 0 Change automatictransmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. I f y o u do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do nor require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED 7-25 BY. The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals. ~~~ Footnotes -f The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of vehicle useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded. ** Drive axle service: 0 Locking Differential - Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level and add fluidas needed. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000miles (25 000 km). Standard Differential - Check fluid level and add fluid as needed at every engine oil change. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy-duty or off-road use. 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** I7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Maintenance Schedule II 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE I SERVICED BY: I 22,500 Miles (37500 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluidas needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE _ . ~- 7-27 SERVICED BY: Maintenance Schedule II 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressurecap. An Emission Control Service. Replace spark plugs (except 2.2L Code 4 engine). An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: L L 7-28 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** ’7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: i 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED 7-29 BY: I Maintenance Schedule II 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, andclutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 7-30 SERVICED BY: Maintenance ScheduleI I 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace spark plugs (except 2.2L Code 4 engine). An Emission Control Service. Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 7-31 SERVICED BY: I Maintenance Schedule II 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brakecable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE SERVICED BY: ACTUAL MILEAGE 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE SERVICED BY: ACTUAL MILEAGE 7-32 Maintenance Schedule II 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, andclutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 17 For 2-Wheel Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whicheveroccurs first). 0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 24 months, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. (Continued) 7-33 Maintenance Schedule II (Continued) 0 Replace spark plugs (except 2.2L Code 4 engine). An Emission Control Service. 17 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. I7 Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY L 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal springs (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. ~ DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY I Kaintenance Schedule II 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0 Replace spark plugs (2.2L Code 4 engine only). An Emission Control Service. 0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the-fluid and-filterdo not require changing. I f y o ~d lo Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: ; Part B: Owner Checks and Services Listed below are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D. At Each Fuel Fill It isimportant for you or a service station attendant to p e ~ o r m these underhood checks at each.fueE.fil1. Engine Oil Level Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details. 7-35 Engine Coolant Level Check the engine coolant level and add the propercoolant mix if necessary. See “Coolant” in the Index for further details. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer tank and add the proper fluidif necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid”in the Index for further details. At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check tire inflation. Make sure tires are inflated to the pressures specified on the CertificatiodTire label located on the driver’s door lock pillar. See “Tires” in the Indexfor further details. Cassette Deck Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details. At Least Four Times a Year Tailgate Lubrication Lubricate tailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivot points, and hinges with lubricant recommended in Part D. Lubricate every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) if following schedule I or every 7,500 miles (1 2 500 km) if following schedule 11. At Least Once aYear Key Lock Cylinders Lubricate the key lockcylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D. Body Lubrication Lubricate all body door hinges,the body hood, fuel door and rear compartment hinges, latches and locks including interior glovebox and console doors, and any moving seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot. PartD tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposedto a corrosive environment. 7-36 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake(see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake. NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service. On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when theclutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service. Steering ColumnLock While parked, and with the parking brakeset, try to turn the key to LOCK in each shift lever position. With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). With a manual transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in REVERSE (R). On vehicles with a key release button, try to turn the key to LOCK without pressing the button. The key should turn to LOCK only with the key button depressed. On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK. 7-37 Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK (P) Mechanism Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. I To check the parking brake: With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. 0 ~ To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: Shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes. Lap and Shoulder Belts Condition and Operation Inspect belt system, including: webbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors, guide loops and anchors. Have a belt assembly replaced if the webbing has been cut or otherwise damaged. Part C; Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Steering and Suspension Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hookup, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections, or other conditions which could cause aheat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumesinto the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index. Accelerator Control System Lubricate all pivot points with engine oil, exceptthe TBI throttle shaft. Do not lubricate the cam pulley. Remove all external deposits from pulley. Do not oil any accelerator or cruisecontrol cables. Replace any cables that have high effort or excessivewear. Drive Axle Service Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. Transfer Case(Four- Wheel Drive) Inspection Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary. Oil the control lever pivotpoint and all exposed control linkage. Check vent hose at transfer case forkinks and proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use. 7-39 Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from yourGM dealer. USAGE Engine Oil Engine Coolant Coolant Supplement Hydraulic Brake System Hydraulic Clutch System Power Steering System FLUID/LUBRICANT Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified ForGasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity.To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. Mixture of water anda good quality ethylene glycol base antifreeze conforming to GM Specification 6038-M (4.3L) or GM Specification 6043-M (2.2L). GM Part No. 3634621 or equivalent with a complete flush and refill. Delco Supreme 1 1 Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 1052535 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). @ Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 12345347 or equivalent). GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 105001 7 or equivalent) conforming to GM Specification 99850 IO. Manual Transmission (2.2L Engine) DEXRON@-I11 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Manual Transmission (4.3L Engine) Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. I2345349 or equivalent). DEXRON@-TI1 Automatic TransAutomatic Transmission mission Fluid. Lubricate with Multi-Purpose LuKey Lock Cylinders bricant (GM Part No. 12345120) or synthetic SAE SW-30 engine oil. 7-40 USAGE Chassis Lubrication Front Wheel Bearings Differential, Standard, Front and Rear Axle FLUID/LUBRICANT Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part No. 105 1344 or equivalent). Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 1052271) or SAESOW-90 GL-5 Gear Lubricant. Differential, Locking Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 1052271) or SAE SOW-90 GL-5 Gear Lubricant. Transfer Case DEXRON@-111 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chassis lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB (GM Part No. 1052497). Column Shift Windshield Washer Solvent GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 105 1515) or equivalent. Transfer Case Shift Lever, Propeller Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. Shaft Slip Splinesand Universal I052497 or equivalent) or lubricant Joints meeting requirements of NLGl Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Clutch Pushrod to Clutch Fork Joint Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Chassis lubricant (GM PartNo. Constant VelocityUniversal Joint 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood Latch Assembly a. Pivots and Spring Anchor a. Engine oil. b. Release Pawl b. Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGT Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. 7-41 USAGE Weatherstrip FLUILULUBRICANT Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges, Latch Bolt, andLinkage Multi-purpose lubricant meeting requirements of GM Part No. 9985 164. Weather Strips Spray-A-Squeak (GM Part No. 1052277). Gas Line De-Icer (GM Part No. 1051516). Gas Line Silicone grease (GM Part No. 1052863) or equivalent. See “Specifications Chart” in the Indexfor recommended replacement filters, valves and spark plugs. Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided afterthe maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them. 7-42 Maintenance Record TO001 7-43 TOO01 Customer AssistanceInformation Section Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects. This section includes information on: The Customer Satisfaction Procedure, Customer Assistance for Hearing or Speech Impaired, BBB Auto Line Alternative Dispute Resolution Program, Reporting Safety Defects, Roadside Assistance, and Service Publications. Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and Chevrolet. Normally, any concern with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s Sales or Service Departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE - Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has already been reviewed with theSales, Service, or Parts Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager. 8-1 STEP TWO - If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannotbe resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance Center in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In Puerto Rico, call 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish). In the U.S. Virgin Islands, call 1-800-496-9994. In other overseas locations, contact GM North American Export Sales in Canada by calling 1-905-644-41 12. For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative: 0 Your name, address, home and business telephone numbers 0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the left top of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage Nature of concern We encourage you to call the toll free number listed previously in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Chevrolet, write to: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P. 0. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of Canadian and GM Overseas offices. When contacting Chevrolet,please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealership’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. 8-2 Customer Assistancefor the Hearing or Speech Impaired(TDD) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, Chevrolet has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer Assistance Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or conventional a teletypewriter (TTY) can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-TDD-CHEV (1-800-833-2438). (TDD users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) GM Participation inBBB AUTO LINE Alternative Dispute Resolution Program * 4’Thisprogram may not be available in all states, depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in this program. Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is very successful. There may be instances where an impartial third-party can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle disputes between customers and automobile manufacturers. This program is available free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle. If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address: BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus 4200 WilsonBoulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203 Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 8-3 To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name and address,your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), anda statement of the nature of your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors. We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary between you and Chevrolet. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligible customers may present their case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about forty days from the time you file a claim until a decision is made. Some state laws may require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1 020. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safetyfrom the Hotline. 8-4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TOTh CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle hasa safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa, Ontario K l G 352. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1 020, or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P. 0. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1 H 8P7 8-5 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 Chevrolet Roadside AssistanceProgram To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to provide the services of theChevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Center. 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Number Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV USA (1-800-243-8872). The call is toll-free and warranty repairs are covered at no cost. Additional services arranged by the Roadside representative may entail charges, and those charges, if any, will be fully explained to you before you authorize us to actin your behalf. Trained representatives are available to help you solve your problem or coordinate a variety of qualityservices through Chevrolet’s dealer network and their preferred service providers. The following services are available: Towing 0 Locksmith 0 Tire repair Rental car or taxi 0 Additional services as necessary For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following available to give to the representative: 0 Vehicle Identification Number 0 License plate number 0 Vehicle color Vehiclelocation 0 Telephone number where you can be reached Vehiclemileage 0 Description of the problem Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the U.S.A. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. 8-6 Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the BUMPER TO BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of 1995 Chevrolet/Geo passenger car and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer for details). COURTESY TRANSPORTATIONINCLUDES: 0 One way SHUTTLE RIDE for any warranty repair completed during the same day. Up to $30 maximum daily VEHICLE RENTAL allowance for any overnight warranty repair up to 5 day, OR Up to $30 maximum daily CAB, BUS, or OTHER transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to 5 day, OR Up to $10 daily FUEL allowance for rides provided by another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to 5 days. Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by your Chevrolet/Geo dealership service management. Claim amount should reflect all actual costs. The Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation Program is not part of the BUMPER TO BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Courtesy Transportation Program at any time without notification. For additional program details contact your Chevrolet/Geo dealer. In Canada,please consult your GM dealer for information on courtesy transportation. The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for utilizing outside services. For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following information available to give to the advisor: Vehicle Identification Number License plate number 0 Vehicle color Vehiclelocation Telephone number where you can be reached Vehicle mileage 0 Description of the problem 8-7 Service and Owner Publications Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals andother service literature are available for purchase for all current and many past model General Motors vehicles. Toll-free telephone numbers for ordering information: United States . . . . . . . . . 1-800-551-4123 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-800-668-5539 Service Manuals Service manuals contain diagnosis and repair informationfor all chassis and body systems. They may be useful for owners who wish to get a greater understanding of their vehicle. Theyare also useful for owners with the appropriate skill level or training who wish to perform “do-it-yourself’ service. These are authentic General Motors’ service manuals meant for professional, qualified technicians. Service Bulletins Service bulletins covering various subjects are regularly sent to all General Motors dealerships. GM monitors product performance in thefield. When service methods are found which promote betterservice on GM vehicles, bulletins are created to help the technician perform better service.Service bulletins may involve any number of vehicles. Some will describe inexpensive service; others will describe expensive service. Some will advise of new or unexpected conditions, and others may help avoid future costly repairs. Service bulletins are meant for qualified technicians. In some cases they refer to service manuals, specialized tools, equipment and safety procedures necessary to service the vehicle. Since these bulletins are issued throughout the model year and beyond, an index is required and published quarterly to help identify specific bulletins. Subscriptions are available. You can order an index at the toll-free numbers listed previously, or ask a GM dealer to see an index or individual bulletin. Owner Publications Owner’s manuals, warranty folders and various owner assistance booklets provide owners with general operation and maintenance information. U I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Irn I I I- h F w v) w 00 c 8 P E c i s 0 6n W Y ?- Ea 1 0 B Index A Air Bag (See “Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System (SIR)”) Readiness Light (See “Lights”) Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle (See “Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System (SIR)”) Air Cleaner (See “Engine-Air Cleaner” Air Conditioning (See “Heater/Air Conditioning Controls”) 3-19 Antennacare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brakes (See “Brakes”) Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Materials Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Arbitration Program (See “Better Business Bureau Mediation”) 3-5 Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc (CD) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3-6 AM-FM Stereo Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette System ............................. 3-7 AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette System with Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 3-18 Care of Your Cassette Player and Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Care of Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delco LOC II@Anti-Theft Feature ............................... 3-15 3-17 Understanding Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission ( See “Transmission”) Axle 6-20 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 LockingRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belts (See “Safety Belts”) Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blizzard (See “Driving-If You’re Caught in a Blizzard”) Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Warning Light (See “Lights”) To Check Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacingparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Warning Light (See “Lights”) Trailer (See “Trailer Brakes”) Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6-29 8-3 6-29 4-5 6-27 6-26 2-22 6-29 6-29 6-28 4-5 4-7 Break.1n. NewVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 6-35 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Composite Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 Front Park Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Halogen Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 RearLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Replacement Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 6-30 Sealed Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities and Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 2-26,4-34 CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of Your Cassette Tape Player (See “Audio Systems”) Cassette Tape Player System (See “AudioSystems”) 6-39 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 CertificatiodTire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 6-55 Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Restraints (See “Safety Belts”) Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) (See “Lamps“) Cigarette LightedAshtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Circuit Breakers (See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”) Cleaning 6-50 Fabric Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 6-48 InsideofVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrumentpanel, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Outsideofvehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 6-51 VinylorLeather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 . . . . . . . . 6-53 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock, Setting the Audio System with Compact Disc (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Audio System without a Compact Disc (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 3-1 Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Disc (CD) System (See “Audio Systems”) 4-4 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant (See “Engine”) 6-62 Cooling System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankcase Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Cruise Control (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 OnHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Passing Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 2-42 To Erase Speed Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ToGetOutOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 To Increase Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 ToReduceSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 ToResume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 ToSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 2 Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-1 Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light (See “Lights”) Differential (See “Axle”) 2-3 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 PowerDoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 SideDoors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Axle (See “Axle”) Driver Position (See “Safety Belts-Driver Position”) Driving 4-23 AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 4-33 If You’re Caught in a Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 5-32 In Mud, Sand, Snow, Or Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 IntheRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Road Driving with Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 4-12 Before You Go Off-Roading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 After Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Through Deep Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 4-31 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Electrical System ..................... 6-59 Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.6.22 6-12 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 5. 3-3 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Coolant Temperature Gage (See “Gages”) 2-26 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.576,.6 1 Oil (See “Oil”) 5-10 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 RunningWhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 6-39 Exhaustsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 F Filter Replacement Chart (See “Service-Replacement Parts and Filter Recommendations”) Fluid Capacity (See “Capacity and Specifications”) 6-30 l;luidLeakCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluids (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”) 2-28.6-19 Four-wheel Drive .......................................... 2-28 Manual Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Electronic Transfer Case ........................................ Fuel 6-4 FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Gage (See “Gages”) Gasolines for Cleaner Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6-62 Tankcapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59,6-65 FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 G Gages Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ................................ FuelGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OilPressureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 2-66 2-54 2-65 2-54 2-55 2-55 2-67 Halogen Bulbs (See “Bulb Replacement”) Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Headlamps Replacement (See “Bulb Replacement”) High Beam Indicator Light (See “Lights”) 2.36, 2.64 High-LowBeam Changer ................................. Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 3-1 Heater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Heater/Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Refrigerant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway Hypnosis (See “Driving-Highway Hypnosis”) Hitches (See “Towing a Trailer”) Wood Checking Under, Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 6-18 HydraulicClutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydroplaning (See “Driving in the Rain”) 4 I If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice. or Snow ........................... Ignitionswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inflation-Tire Pressure ( See “Tires”) Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrumentpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 2-10 2-53 2-53 Jacking Equipment Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Jumpstarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 K KeyLockCylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 2-11 2-6 2-1 L Labels Certificatioflire ( See “Certification/Tire Label”) Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 2-46 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 FogLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlights (See “Headlamps”) Replacement (See “Bulb Replacement”) 2-43 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Air Bag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 2-58 BrakeSystemLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Charging System Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Check Gages Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45. 2-63 Headlamp High Beam Indicator Light ............................. 2-64 Headlights (See “Headlamps”) 2-60.6-39 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Safety Belt Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Engine Soon (See “Malfunction Indicator”) Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21.2-63 2-64 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Light ....................... Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 TraileringPackage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 440 Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-Tiered Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Lock Cylinders (See “Key Lock Cylinders”) Loss of Control (See “Driving-Loss of Control”) Lubrication (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”) 5 M Malfunction Indicator Lamp(See “Lights”) Maintenance (See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’) Maintenance Record (See “Scheduled MaintenanceServices”) Master Cylinder (See “Brakes”) Mirrors Convexoutside ............................................... Inside ....................................................... Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction Lever .............................................. 2-48 2-46 2-47 2-48 2-34 OBDII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Odometer (See “Gages”) Off-Road Driving (See “Driving”) Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Pressure Gage (See “Gages”) 6-8 ToCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WhatKindtoUse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 WhentoAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 What to Do with Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 7-35 Owner Checks and Services ........................................ P Parking Brake ( See “Brakes-Parking”) On Hills ( See “Towing-Parking On Hills”) 2-25 Over Things That Burn ......................................... 2-25 Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passing (See “Driving-Passing”) Payload (See “LoadingYour Vehicle”) Periodic Maintenance Inspections (See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”) Power Door Locks ( See “Doors”) Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 SteeringFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Winches (See “Winches”) 6-23 Radiator Pressure Cap ............................................ Radio (See “Audio Systems”) Rear Axle (See“Axle”) Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides (See “Safety Belts”) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”) Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Reporting Safety Defects To The United States Government (See “Safety Defects”) 8-6 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Checking Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center Front Seat Position (60/40 Split Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Center Seat Position (Except 60140 Split Bench Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 1-30 Jump Seats (Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 1-30 Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22.1-23 : ...................... 1-10 Lap Shoulder Belt ...................... 1-10 Properwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Rear Seat Passengers (Extended Cab Jump Seats) ..................... Reminder Light (See “Lights”) . . 1-35 Replacing Seat and Restraint Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 1-21 UseDuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Why Safety Belts Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Chains (See “Towing a Trailer”) Safety Defects . . . . . 8-5 Reporting Safety Defects to Canada ...................... Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States ........................ 8-4 Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Scheduled Maintenance Services 742 Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Schedule I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 7-26 Maintenanceschedule II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 Selecting the Right Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7-3 Using Your Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-1 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab) .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 1-2 Front Seat (Easy Entry Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Seat (Except Easy Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 7 Seats (continued) 1-4 Front Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump Seat (Extended Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 LumbarAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Reclining Front Seatbacks (Bucket Seats or 60/40 Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Service Bulletins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Doing YourOwn Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 PartsIdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Replacement Parts and Filter Recommendations .... . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 Service Engine Soon Light (See “Lights”) Shift Indicator Light (See “Lights”) 2-23 Shifting Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SpareTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Specifications Chart (See “Service - Replacement Parts and Filter Recommendations”) Speedometer and Odometer (See “Gages”) Starting Your Engine (See “Engine-Starting”) 4-7 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InEmergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 SunVisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System (SIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 How the Air Bag System Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 T Tachometer (See “Gages”) Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-8 Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 TiltWheel (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 Balancing (See “Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance”) 6-45 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat (See “Changing a Flat Tire”) ...................................... 6-41 InspectionandRotation Loading (See “Loading Your Vehicle”) New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 Spare (See “Spare Tire”) 5-23 UnderbodyCarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UniformTireQualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 Top Strap (See “Safety Belts-Child Restraints”) Torque Lock (See “Transmission-Torque Lock”) Towing 4-43 ATrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-46 4-48 ParkingonHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 SafetyChains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 4-45 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recreational Vehicle (Four-wheel Drive Only) ...................... 4-35 5-6 TowingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 6 2-68,6-60 Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailering Package ( See “Loading Your Vehicle”) 6-19 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic ( See “Four Wheel Drive”) Manual ( See “Four Wheel Drive”) Transmission 2-17 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Check and Change Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6-14 HowToCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HowToAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 2-20 Five-Speed Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Whentocheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 6-17 HowToCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 HowToAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Light ( See “Lights”) 2-25 Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip Odometer ( See “Gages”) Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Vehicle v Damagewarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57, 6-58 Loading ( See “Loading Your Vehicle”) Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 .... Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v, vi, vu, vlll Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 Voltmeter ( See “Gages”) W Warning Devices. Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Flashers ( See “Hazard Warning Flashers”) Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hub Caps and Wheel Nut Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NutTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 5-2 2-56 6-45 5-25 6-62 645 6-46 Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SlidingRear ................................................. Swing-OutWindows(ExtendedCab) ............................. Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WasherFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WiperBladeChatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WiperBladeCleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................................... WiperBladeReplacement 10 4-35 2-32 2-33 2-33 2-37 6-25 2-36 6-52 6-52 6-36 C9508